Commentary on Thucydides: Book 7 Edgar Carew Marchant Perseus Project, Tufts University Gregory Crane Prepared under the supervision of Lisa Cerrato Anne Mahoney Jeffrey Rydberg-Cox David Smith National Endowment for the Humanities Trustees of Tufts University Medford, MA Perseus Project Perseus 3.0 viaf76387703.viaf004.perseus-eng1.xml Available under a Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License Thucydides Book VII Edgar Carew Marchant London Macmillan & Company 1919 HathiTrust

This pointer extracts book and chapter and section.

This pointer extracts book and chapter.

This pointer extracts book.

English Greek French Latin

Ὁ —the art. added because this is a continuation of the narrative from VI. 104. Contrast c. 2.1, where the art. is omitted because there is a transition to new points.

Γύλιππος —son of Cleandridas, who had settled at Thurii, on which see c. 33.6 note. His appointment to command in Sicily was the immediate result of Alcibiades' advice. Nothing is known of his previous history. ( His character is in some points not Spartan. He is quick, enterprising, full of resource, able to adapt himself to all men and to all circumstances. Freeman . This character reminds us of the description which Pericles gave of the Athenians.)

ὁ —the art. again because the persons are thought of separately. Contrast c. 80.1 τῷ Ν καὶ Δ ἐδόκει.

Πυθὴν —Corinthian captain. Syr. envoys had gone to Corinth in the winter of 415, and Corinth had at once resolved to assist her colony.

τοῦ Τ —T. has been all genders. In Attic it is masc., on the analogy of all nouns in ‐ρας; in Alexandrine writers it became fem.; the Romans made it neut.

Τάραντος —Gyl. had been driven by foul weather to seek shelter there. T.—regnata Laconi rura Phalanto—was founded circ. 705 B.C. after the first Messenian war.

ἐπεσκεύασαν —VI. 104 τὰς ναῦς ἐπεσκεύαζεν. Diod. XIII. 1 τὰς ναῦς ἐπεσκεύασαν . . . τριήρεις κατεσκεύασαν . . . . τοῦ στόλου παρεσκευασμένου. To the Latin sense of apparatus παρασκευὴ corresponds; while κατασκευὴ has the English sense of the same word.

Λοκροὺς —founded about 690 B.C. on land belonging to the Sicels. Now Gerace.

ἤδη —they had received several false reports that Syr. was entirely shut in.

κατὰ τὰς Ἐ. —via: cf. II. 76.4 κατὰ χῶμα προσάγειν. Epipolae includes all the high ground west of Achradina which was not inclosed in the fortifications of the city.

στρατιᾷ —dat. of accompaniment, only used in naval and military expressions.

ἐβουλεύοντο —because before they had supposed that the only chance of getting into Syr. was by eluding the A. fleet.

ἐν δεξιᾷ λαβόντες —except here Thuc. always uses ἔχειν ἐν δ., ἐν ἀριστερᾷ.

διακινδυνεύσωσιν —so II. 4 ἐβουλεύοντο εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν εἴτε τι ἄλλο χρήσωνται. Thuc. does not use πότερον . . ἤ. He uses πότερον twice, VIZ. I. 80 πῶς χρὴ . . ἐπειχθῆναι : πότερον ταῖς ναυσίν ; and VI. 38 τί καὶ βούλεσθε; πότερον ἄρχειν ; In both cases ἀλλὰ follows (ὑποφορά), as in Andoc. I. 148 τίνα γὰρ άναβιβάσωμαι; τὸν πατέρα; ἀλλὰ τέθνηκεν. ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἀδελφούς; ἀλλ’ οὐκ εἰσίν.

διακινδυνεύσωσιν ἐσπλεῦσαι —of the compounds of κινδυνεύω, ἀνα‐, ἀπο‐, δια‐, παρα‐ are found with infin.; ἐπι‐, προ‐, συγ‐ are not.

Ἱμέραν —founded 646 B.C. from Zancle, to be a stronghold against Phoenician Panormus. It was destroyed for ever by the Carthaginians in 408.

αὐτούς —τοὺς Ἱμεραίους, the name of the people implied in the name of their city, as constantly.

οὓς —after the collective στρατιάν.

καὶ ἔδοξεν —cf. VIII. 8 ἐβουλεύοντο, καὶ ἔδοξε πρῶτον ἐς Χῖον πλεῖν αὐτοῖς.

ὅμως —in spite of his previous indifference; VI. 104 ὑπερεῖδε τὸ πλῆθος . . . καὶ οὐδεμίαν φυλακήν πω ἐποιεῖτο.

ἃς . . . ἀπέστειλε —aor. for plup. in dependent clause, as constantly.

πυνθανόμενος . . . εἶναι —generally πυνθάνομαι and αἰσθάνομαι take the partic.

φυλακὴν —concrete, as in φυλακὰς καθίστασθαι II. 24.

περαιοῦνται διὰ —cf. I. 107 διὰ τοῦ κόλπου περαιοῦσθαι. The accus. is the ordinary constr.

τοῦ πορθμοῦ —IV. 24 ἔστι δὲ ὁ πορθμὸς ἡ μεταξὺ Ῥηγίου θἀλασσα καὶ Μεσσήνης.

σχόντες Ῥηγίῳ — σχεῖν is also constructed with ἐς and κατά. (Bekker Anecd. I. 173 σχών, δοτικῇ· Θουκυδίδης ἑβδόμῳ.)

Μεσσήνῃ —its older name was Zancle, from Sicel Danklon, a reaping-hook, = ἀγκών .

τούς τε Ἱμεραίους —co-ordinate with καὶ τοὺς Σελινουντίους ἐκέλευον.

καὶ αὐτούς —the καὶ is epexegetic, introducing the explanation of ξυμπολεμεῖν.

ἀνείλκυσαν —so that the oarsmen were available as infantry.

τοὺς Σ. πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον —observe (1) that when a partie. and verb apply to a common object, the object follows the constr. required by the partic., (2) that πέμπω is a regular exception to this rule in such phrases as κήρυκα, πρέσβεις, ἀποίκους, πἐμψαντες, as they are so frequently used absolutely that the object is generally not accommodated to the partic. at all: cf. II. 27 τὴν Αίγιναν πέμψαντες εποίκους έχειν: VIII. 40 Ἀστύοχον πέμψαντες ἐκέλευον. Contrast c. 3 μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς το φρούριον αἱρεῖ: c. 85 ὲπι τους τριακοσιους πἐμψαντες ξυνέλαβον .

πανστρατιᾷ —Selinus only sent ψιλούς τινας καὶ ἱππέας (§ 5), as it was at war with Segesta. (Thuc. is fond of thus contrasting great projects with meagre performances. Cf II. 93 .)

χωρίον —meanings (1) a strategical position, (2) a farm.

Σικελῶν τινες —the S were a Latin tribe, and were driven from Latinm into Bruttium, whence they were again driven over to Sicily by the Opicans.

προσχωρεῖν —the greater part of the S. had supported the Athenians through enmity with Syracuse since 451 B.C., when the Sicel lcader Ducetius had defeated the combined forces of Acragas and Syracuse.

Ἀρχωνίδου —he had aided Ducetins in founding Calacte on the N. coast of Sicily. When D. died in 440, Syracuse feared that A. would revive the power of the Sicels, and so made war on them.

ταύτῃ —i.e. those of Northern Sicily.

τινῶν —A. was prince of Herbita, and his territory, or at least his influence, probably extended to Calacte on the north coast.

ἐκ Λακ. . . . ἥκειν —here ἥκω expresses come duly to their assistance, as in βοήθεια ἥξει III. 4; c. 16.3 ; ὠφελία ἥξει VI. 93. Cf. VI 73 ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα πρέσβεις ἀπέστειλαν ὅπως ξυμμαχία αὐτοῖς παραγένηται. The word ἥκω is constantly so used in drama, esp. in addressing persons who have come to bring help.

προθύμως —cf. VI. 18 π. παραγίγνεσθαι, and c. 66 and 70 π. ἀντιλαβέσθαι .

καὶ —and so, giving the result, as often.

σφετέρων —ἑαυτοῦ would be more correct here and in c. 3.4; but the whole side is meant.

ἐς χιλίους —direct object of ἀναλαβών. A prep. and its case may stand for subj. or obj. of a verb.

τοὺς πάντας —πᾶς preceded by the art. gives the sum total. Cf. II. 7 ἐς τὸν πάντα ἀριθμόν. (The Sicels were always a number of isolated atoms except only when united under Ducetius and to some extent under Archonides.)

Λευκάδος —Gylippus and Pythen had left the Cor. here with filteen ships, and had sailed out with four, hoping to prevent Italy from joining Athens, but despairing of Sicily.

ὡς εἶχον τάχους —cf. c. 57 ως ἑκαστοι τῆς ξυντυχίας ἔσχον . VI. 97 ὡς ἕκαστος τάχους εἶχε . Tac. Ann. 15.53 ut quisque audentiae habuisset accurrerunt is a conscions imitation of this. Xen. Hel. 4.5.15 ὡς τάχους ἕ. εἶχε. Herod. VI. 116 ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον.

ἀφικνεῖται —having entered by the Little Harbour (called Laccrus), eluding the A. fleet which commanded the Great Harbour.

μέλλοντας ἐκκλησιάσειν —there is no evidence to prove that ‘it was the very day,’ as Freeman says, ‘which had been fixed for the discussion.’ Thuc. only says that they intended to discuss the question of peace.

Λακ. ἀποστειλάντων —Krüger notes that the gen. abs. is often thus placed qualifying a verb. Cf. V. 4 τρίτος αὐτὸς Ἀθηναίων πεμπόντων ἐξέπλευσε.

ᾐσθάνοντο —by message from him.

Ἰετὰς —Steph. Byz. says Philistus referred to it as φρούριον Σικελίας; but it is quite unknown.

τότε —Classen refers this to ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ, but as Thuc. never uses τότε with reference to the period implied in a temporal expression, Poppo rightly refers it to οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐξῆλθον.

τεῖχος . . . τῶν Σικελῶν —the perversion of the natural order adds emphasis to τῶν Σικελῶν. Cf. II. 5.5 ἐν σπονδαῖς σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν τὴν πόλιν, where σφῶν belongs to τὴν πόλιν. Cf. on c. 17.3, 4, and 18, 1.

ἐν τῇ παρόδῳ —So I. 126; cf. ἐν ὁδῷ εἶναι, to be on the road.

ἑλών, καὶ ξυν —when two partic. are joined by καί, the action of the one generally precedes that of the other in time, or gives the cause of it. The former may be the case here. (Hw. and Sta. bracket καί.)

Εὐρὐηλον —it is strange enough that the Syr. should not have established an outpost on the point of the ‘Broad Nail’ in the winter of 415 when the fortifications were extended; but still stranger that G. should have found Euryelus now undefended by the Athenians.

μετὰ τῶν Σ. they had joined him by marching through the open space north of the A. lines.

l 21.

ἔτυχε . . . ἐλθὼν —with the aor. of τυγχάνω, φθάνω, λανθάνω the aor. partic. expresses time not antecedent to, but coincident with the time of the verb. To express time antecedent to the time of these verbs, either (1) the pres. or imperf. of these verbs must be used, or (2) if the aor. is used, the perf. partic is necessary. Cf. on c. 4.3.

κατὰ τοῦτο τοῦ καιροῦ —cf. c. 69 ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ τοῦ καιροῦ; c. 33 ἐν τούτῳ τύχης. Cf. also the idiom εἰς τοῦτο (τοσοῦτο) ἐλθεῖν (ἀφικέσθαι, ἥκειν) with gen.; id temporis; eo (furoris) venire (Phrynichus says that the noun of time requires the art., but no such rule was known to Attic authors, the art. being employed or omitted according to the whim of the writer or as the meaning required. Rutherford.)

ἑπτὰ . . . ἢ ὀκτὼ —it would be about seven to the fort on the κρημνός, about eight to the κύκλος, as far as the building was then completed. (Those who think that the κύκλος was further north, and that the wall between it and the κρημνὸς was double —Classen, Holm, Lupus, Muller—are foreed to bracket ἑπτὰ . . σταδίων, as the length of the double wall must then be considerably greater. See Intr. p. xii.)

μὲν —answered by τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ. The double wall, as nearly completed, is contrasted with the northern wall, very incomplete. (Fr. Muller and Oeltze de particularum μέν et δέ usu Halle '87 place μὲν between ἐς and τὸν helow.)

σταδίων —gen. of measure; cf. II. 13 τὰ μακρἁ τείχη τεσσαράκοντα σταδίων. The position of the gen. is due to the antithesis, which often causes a disturbance of the natural order. See on c. 17.3 .

ἀπετετέλεστο —on the question whether Thuc. here neglects to take account of the wall between the κύκλος and the κρημνος, see Intr. p. xiii.

ἐς τον . . . λιμένα —it crossed three levels, (1) a short portion of Epipolae, (2) τὸ ὁμαλόν, the level just below the κρημνός, (3) τὸ ἕλος, the marshy ground about Lysimeleia.

διπλοῦν —contra exteriorem etiam hostem, Jastus Lipsis. Cf. Lucian Ver. hist. I. 19. Endymion the king of the moon made war on Phaethon k. of the sun, because the latter had prevented Endymion from colonising Hesperus. The Nephelocentaurs in Phaethon's service build a wall ὥστε μηκέτι τὰς αὐγὰς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἡλἰου πρὸς τὴν σελήνην διήκειν. τὸ δὲ τεῖχος ἦν διπλοῦν, ὥστε σαφὴς ἔκλειψις τῆς σελήνης ἐγεγόνει. This produced peace.

τὸ πρὸς τὴν θ. —epexegetic of τι. Cf. VIII. 21 ἐς διακοσίους τινὰς τοὺς πάντας.

τῷ δὲ ἄλλῳ (ἄνὠ τοῦ κ. —the remainder of the wall north of the fort; the same as τὸ πρὸς βορέαν τοῦ κύκλου τεῖχος in VI. 99. Cf. Herod. I. 72 of the course of the Halys ῥέων ἄνω πρὸς βορέην. (So in VI. 99 κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου =south of the κ., as Sitzler explains. Without ἄνω there are two ways of taking the text: (1) τῷ ἄλλῳ=ἑτέρωθι on the other side of, of which meaning there is no example; or (2) making πρὸς τὸν Τρώγιλον govern τοῦ κύκλου for the rest of the wall on the Trogilus side of the κ., but, from the analogy of other prepositional phrases, it is clear that even so τοῦ κύκλου must be ‘partitive’; cf. IV. 108.1 τὰ (τοῦ ποταμοῦ) πρὸς Ἠιόνα; IV. 5 τοῦ χωρίου τὸ πρὸς ἤπειρον. This would necessitate taking κύκλος here to mean the whole circumference of the walls, as in II. 13; but κ. must mean a central point between the two pieces of wall spoken of, as it clearly does in all the other passages— VI. 98, 99, 101 , 102.)

ἔστιν ἃ . . . τὰ δὲ —for τὰ μὲν . . τὰ δὲ . .

καὶ ἡμίεργα . . . καὶ ἐξειργασμένα —the first καὶ marks the antithesis between τῷ πλἐονι and ἔστιν ἄ, the second that between ἔστιν ἃ and τὰ δέ.

παρὰ τοσοῦτον —cf. VIII. 33 παρὰ τοσοῦτον ἐγένετ’ αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις, and παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Herod. 9.33.

μὲν —in transition, as often, like μὲν δή, II. 4 οἱ μὲν δὴ οὕτως ἐπεπράγεσαν. οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ; III. 24.

αἰφνιδίως —Thuc. uses ἄφνω, αἰφνιδίως, ἐξαίφνης, and, in the earlier books, ἐξαπίνης and ἐξαπιναίως. The last two are Ionic.

σφίσιν —indirect reflexive, not referring to the subj. of its own clause, but to that of the main clause. Hence σφεῖς is regularly used only in subord. sentences. But (1) Thuc. sometimes uses σφᾶς like Ionic writers, for σφᾶς αὐτοὺς or ἐαυτούς, as II. 65 αὐτοὶ ἐν σφίσι . . . ἐσφάλησαν. (2) He uses ἑαυτῶν, like Attic writers, for σφῶν or σφετέρας, as II. 7 οἱ Λακ. πόλεις ξυμμαχίδας ποιούμενοι ὅσαι ἦσαν ἐκτὸς τῆς ἑαυτῶν δυνάμεως, where εαυτῶν refers to Λακεδαιμόνιοι .

ἐπιόντων —as Thuc. has given no hint that Gyl. had as yet passed the Athenian lines, and as the Syr. had gone out to meet him, we may assume that he was still on the west side of the lines.

ἐθορυβήθησαν μὲν . . . παρετάξαντο δέ —sharp antithesis, as III. 101 ὁμήρους μὲν ἔδοσαν, ἠκολούθουν δὲ οὔ.

θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα —lit. having grounded arms, taken up a position, cum constitisset.

ἐγγὺς —apparently in the plain, before the διπλοῦν τεῖχος.

προσπέμπει —in this use of πἐμπω the historic pres. is commoner than the aor. If the negotiation is elaborate, the imperf. is used.

λέγοντα —contrast II. 85 πέμπουσι ξυμβούλους κελεύοντες. The nom. and accus. are both used. Cf. III. 52 προσπέμπει αὐτοῖς κήρυκα λἐγοντα. (Meineke and Hw. λἐγων or λέξοντα Kr. thinks λέγοντα may be spurious.)

εἰ βούλονται —formal expression in proposing terms; e.g. IV. 37 ἐκήρυξαν εἰ βούλοιντο τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι .

ἡμερῶν —any time within the period, like νυκτός, ἡμέρας.

ἑτοῖμος —as though λέγων had preceded. Cf. V. 41 οὐκ ἐώντων μεμνῆσθαι περὶ αὐτῆς, ἀλλ’ εἰ βούλονται σπένδεσθαι, ἑτοῖμοι εἶναι; VIII. 48.6.

ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ποιεῖσθαι —sc. αὐτά, the proceeding, as in IV. 5 ἑορτὴν ἔτυχον ἄγοντες καὶ ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο. Cf. ἐν with ἔχω, τίθεσθαι, εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, as I. 35 ἐν ἀδικήματι θήσονται ; Aesch. PB 239 ἐν οἴκτῳ προθέμενος; ἐν ὀργῇ ἔχειν, etc.

οὐδὲν ἀποκρινάμενοι —Plutarch says the soldiers asked whether the coming of a single Spartan had so emboldened them. Cf. Isocr. Archid. 52 ἀναμνήσθητε ὅτι εἰ πολιορκουμένῃ τινὶ τῶν πόλεων εἷς μόνος Λακεδαιμονίων βοηθήσειεν. ὑπὸ πάντων ἂν ὡμολογεῖτο παρὰ τοῦτον γενέσθαι τὴν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς.

ἀλλήλοις —added to show that the subj. is no longer οἱ δέ.

ἐπανῆγε —i.e. further westwards, away from the Athenian lines, and in the review ground west of Lysimeleia. Gyl. had apparently not yet entered Syr. (The edd. say eastwards, and assume that Gyl had passed between the Athenian lines and the walls of Syr As Freeman says, such εὐρυχωρία could have been found only to the west of the A. wall. But he too thinks that Gyl. had been east of the lines till now, and had to march out round the north of the lines, not venturing to meet the A. in the narrow space between their fort and the city walls. Diodorus says nothing; but Plutarch Nic. 19 has προσῆγεν εὐθὺς ὁ Γύλιππος ἐξ ὁδοῦ παρατεταγμένος.)

μᾶλλον —with τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν the more open ground. Cf. III. 107 ἐν τῷ εὐωνύμῳ μᾶλλον .

ἡσύχαζε —the opposite of πολεμῶ, and so means to abstain from acts of hostility. Cf. c. 12.1.

ἑαυτῶν —plur., as in c. 1.5.

τείχει —i.e. τὸ διπλοῦν τ.

ᾡς . . ἔγνω —ὅτε is used when two acts are represented as simultaneous; ἐπειδὴ when the act of its verb precedes that of the main verb; ὡς when no connection between the time of the two acts is expressed.

ἀπήγαγε —by marching round the northern extremity of the Athenian lines.

Τεμενῖτιν —it had been taken into the city and fortified in the preceding winter.

ὅπως —by far the commonest final particle in Thuc., and rather commoner than ἵνα in Xen. In all other authors ἵνα very greatly predominates. (See table in M.T. p. 398.)

ὰλλοσε —esp. to Labdalum.

πέμψας —back by the way by which he had come.

τὸ φρούριον —as Gyl. intended to build his cross-wall along the north of Epipolae, it was necessary first to get possession of Labdalum.

τὸ Λάβδαλον —in III. 97 the name means the neighbourhood so called, but here it is the fort built there. Nicias had made no use of L., and did not even keep up proper communications with it. After Gyl. had passed it, it should have been abandoned

αἱρεῖ καὶ . . . ἀπέκτεινεν —cf. II. 67 ξυλλαμβάνει . . . καὶ ἐκέλευσεν; 69 ἀποθνῄσκει . . . καὶ διέφθειρε.

οὐκ ἐπιφανὲς —because the ridge on which the fort stood was lower than the centre of Epipolae.

τριήρης . . . ἁλίσκεται —an event of importance, as this was the first Syracusan success at sea. The Syr. were beginning to think of regaining control of the Great Harbour which they had lost since the A. flcet sailed thither from Thapsus.

ἐφορμοῦσα —sent out from the A. fleet to the mouth of the Harbour.

ἐτείχιζον —his main object now is to hinder them from carrying their north wall to the edge of the cliff, and down to the water on that side. A wall running east and west was to be built. Freeman . This is the third Syr. counterwork.

διὰ τῶν Ἐπιπολῶν . . . ἐγκάρσιον —four expressions are here given in order to fix the direction: (1) διὰ τῶν Ἐ. shows that the wall was to run along E.: (2) ἀπὸ τῆς π. ἀρξάμενοι shows that it was to run from east to west: (3) ἄνω north of the κύκλος, as VI. 99 κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου south of it; cf. on c. 2.4; (4) πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον at an angle to the north wall of the A. (The meaning of ἄνω is much disputed: (a) Freeman says it means that ‘the wall was carried westwards, up the slope,’ with which the note in Jowett agrees. So Stahl. In this case ἄνω adds nothing new, but—as often—only gives the general direction which is further defined by the words following it—viz. πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον; (b) Classen renders ‘along the northern height’ and Fr. Muller ‘north of the κύκλος,’ which is much the same thing. This is better, because (1) it enables us to give the same meaning throughout the description to ἄνω, viz. ‘north’ (cf. c. 4.3) of the place specified; (2) if ἄνω does not mean north, there is nothing to show on which side of the κύκλος the new wall ran. This can indeed be inferred from what follows, but in the case of the other counterworks Thuc. states clearly that the one was κάτωθεν τοῦ κύκλου, the other διὰ τοῦ ἔλους; (3) ἄνω thus gives a new indication of direction and does not merely repeat the other expressions.)

πρὸς τὸ ἐγκάρσιον —adverbial, cross-wise: with prepositional phrases used adverbially the article is rarely found.

ὅπως . . . εἰ μὴ δύναιντο . . . μηκέτι οἷοί τε ὦσιν —when ἐὰν and subj. is changed into εἰ and opt, the subj in a final clause is regularly changed into opt.; the only exceptions in Thuc. are this passage and IV. 120 ὅπως, εἰ . . . περιτυγχάνοι, ἡ τριήρης ἀμύνῃ (V. l. ἀμύνοι ),

ἀποτειχίσαι —to invest the city, by completing the northern wall.

l. 7

οἵ τε Ἀθηναῖοι ἀνεβεβήκεσαν . . . καὶ ὁ Γ. . . . ἐπῄει —cf. II. 59 ἥ τε γῆ αὐτῶν ἐτέτμητο τὸ δεύτερον καὶ ἡ νόσος ἐπέκειτο. The A. had lately (ἤδη) gone up when Gyl. made his attack; τε . . . καὶ are parataetic and deseribe nearly simultaneous events.

τὸ ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ —i.e. they had finished the small piece referred to in c. 2.4. Thuc. always writes ἐπὶ θαλάσσῃ, and so the orators unless some particular sea is referred to, as Demosth. VI. 12 τῆς ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ ἀρχῆς.

ἦν γὰρ κ.τ λ. —cf. c. 48 καί (ἦν γάρ τι . . .; I. 137 καί (ἦν γὰρ ἀγνὼς. . .

τείχους —the northern wall.

ἔτυχον . . αὐλιζόμενοι —imperf. partic. of prolonged action; the A. were bivouacking by chance outside their fortress, on the east side. ἐτύγχανον αὐλισάμενοι would mean they had bivouacked by chance. Cf. on c. 2.4.

ὡς ᾔσθοντο —the regular periphrasis for αἰσθόμενοι when the partic. would be inelegant.

σφετέρους —after ὁ. See on c. 1.5.

πάλιν —is placed after the verb when not emphatic. It is esp. common after ἀπάγειν and ἀναχωρεῖν.

ὑψηλότερον —pred.; cf. II. 75 ᾔρετο μἐγα .

ἄλλους —exclusive; cf. c. 61.1.

ἕκαστοι —this word is frequently put into the relative clause, like quisque, instead of in the principal clause.

τὸ Πλημμύριον — the A. fleet was now . . . in the north-western corner of the harbour, near the swamp of Lysimeleia . . . Now that the Syr. were beginning to stir by sea, such a position gave them no command of the harbour in general. . . . Everything now had to come by sea, at a great disadvantage, as long as the A. had no command of the mouth of the harbour. . . . N. therefore determined to occupy Plemmyrion. Freeman .

ἀντιπέρας —the view from it takes in the whole extent of Ortygia and Achradina.

ῥᾷον — ῥᾴων would be expected; but ἡ ἐσκομιδὴ ἔσται is treated as passive of τὴν ἐσκομιδὴν ποιήσομαι, so that ἔσται would more naturally be γενήσεται, as in II. 18 χαλεπῶς ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐγίγνετο. Cf. c. 28.1 (γίγνεται and ἐστὶ are frequently qualified by an adv. in such phrases as κακῶς γίγνεται = it turns out badly for; so that ῥᾷον here is not opposed to Gk. idiom.)

δῑ ἐλάσσονος —local, as in δῑ ὀλίγου 36, 5; at a shorter distance from the Syracusan fleet.

πρὸς τῷ λιμένι —cf. VIII. 94 τοῦ πολέμου . . . πρὸς τῷ λιμένι ὄντος, of a battle close to Peiraeus. The phrase means near the mouth of the harbour. The fleet would now be drawn up just inside the harbour, and there would be less danger of disasters like that related in c. 3.5 when provisions were to be brought in.

ἐκ μυχοῦ —the north-western corner, close to the point at which the double wall touched the harbour

τὰς ἐπαναγωγὰς —putting out against an enemy; ἐπαγωγή, conveyance of provisions, as c. 24.

ποιήσεσθαι —see index, s. v. ποιεῖσθαι.

ἤν τι . . . κινῶνται —the full sentence is εἰ τειχισθείη, ἐφαίνετο οὐκ . . . ποιήσεσθαι, ἤν τι ναυτικῷ κ.; hence there are two protases, both of which, in the recta, are subj. with ἤν. In these cases, the first protasis is the principal condition, the second the subordinate. Cf. Andoc. I. 149 ἐὰν τοῖς ἐχθροῖς πεισθῆτε, οὐδ’ ἂν ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ὑμῖν μεταμελήσῃ, οὐδὲν ἔτι πλέον ποιήσετε.

κινῶνται —(1) sc. οἱ Συρακόσιοι. Thuc. changes the subject more rapidly than we should do. Cf. II. 3 ὅπως μὴ προσφέρωνται (οἱ Πλαταιῆς) καὶ σφίσιν ἐκ τοῦ ἴσου γίγνωνται (οἱ Θηβαῖοι), (2) passive voice, as usual with verbs used reflexively, the purely reflexive use of the mid. being quite rare. Cf. v. 8 ὡς εἶδε κινουμένους τοὺς Ἀθηναίους.

προσεῖχέ τε —in fact he was now disposed to give more attention to naval warfare.

ἐπειδὴ —in temporal sentences where the indic. was used in the Recta, it is always retained in the Obliqua.

ἧκεν —cf. c. 1.4 .

στρατιὰν —troops; the greater part of the army was still encamped along the walls.

φρούρια — N. built three forts, a greater and two smaller. . . . The new station, standing apart from the constant fighting which went on around the walls on Epipolae, was thought to be a safer resting-place for provisions and stuff generally. Freeman .

σκεύη —stores; cf. c. 24.2.

ἔκειτο —Thuc. always uses the simple verb instead of άπόκειμαι in this sense.

τὰ μεγάλα —i.e. transports.

ὥστε —quamobrem. In Homer ὥστε is used only in a comparative and causal sense. In tragedy, when used with the indic. (not found in Aesch.), ὥστε nearly always = quamobrem, and this use is common in Thuc, as II. 87, and other prose authors.

πληρωμάτων —one of the many nouns in ‐μα which is used in a concrete sense, of persons. They are esp. common in tragedy, as δούλευμα, slave, πτῶμα, fallen body.

κάκωσις ἐγένετο —pass. of κάκωσιν ποιεῖσθαι. Thuc. is esp. fond of abstract nouns in ‐σις, as δήλωσις, ὀλόφυρσις, ξύλωσις, and probably coined some himself.

χρώμενοι —causal, joined to ὁπότε ἐξέλθοιεν. Such juxtaposition of dissimilar expressions is far commoner in Thuc. than in other authors. Tacitus imitates the mannerism.

ἐγγύθεν —adv joined to adj. σπανίῳ, as VIII 48 ἄκριτοι καὶ βιαιότερον ἀποθνῄσκειν, and often.

ἐπὶ φρυγ. . . . ἐξέλθοιεν — ἐπὶ with accus. after verbs of motion corresponds to the supine in -um.

τῶν ἱππέων —having gone round the west end of Epipolae.

Συρακοσίοις —as the subject, μέρος ἱππέων, of the pluperf. pas is personal, the dat. is ethic rather than dat. of the agent. Contrast ταῦτα πέπρακταί μοι (When the subject of the perf. pas. is personal, the agent is regularly expressed by ὑπό.)

ἵνα μὴ . . ἐξίοιεν —epexegetic of διὰ τοὺς ἐν τῷ Π., as in I. 99 διὰ τὴν ἀπόκνησιν τῶν στρατειῶν, ἵνα μὴ ἀπ’ οἴκου ὦσι.

Ὀλυμπιείῳ —this includes (a) the τέμενος of the god, (b) the adjacent land. There are still two gaunt pillars of the temple standing.

πολίχνῃ —later this was turned into a proper name.

ἐτετάχατο —cf. ἀφίκατο c. 75. The termination is Ionic, but is occasionally found in other Attic prose writers; e.g. Xen. Anab. IV. 8.5 ἀντιτετάχαται. (Moeris wrongly says ἐτετάχατο Ἀττικῶσ’ τεταγμένοι ἦσαν Ἑλληνικῶς .)

εἴρητο —legular word of military instructions.

ναυλοχεῖν αὐτάς —to lic in wait for them.

προπαρεβάλοντο —had previously laid in a line for use, i.e. for the wall from the circle to Trogilus

σφίσιν —for σφίσιν αὐτοῖς or ἑαυτοῖς. Cf. on c. 3.1. Thuc. often uses σφᾶς thus as a primary reflexive, referring to the subj. of its own clause; but not when the reflexive is emphatic or in antithesis.

τοῦ τειχίσματος —the cross-wall which he was building.

ἦρχε —was first to )( ἤρχετο began to.

τειχισμάτων —the incomplete Athenian wall and the Syracusan cross-wall.

χρῆσις ἦν —another case of simple abstract nouns (esp in ‐σις and ‐μα) with εἰμί, γίγνομαι. Cf. c. 4.6; 16.2.

οὐκ ἔφη . . ἐκείνων ἀλλ’ ἑαυτοῦ —the general principle in Gk. antithesis is that the more emphatic clause comes second. (The rule might be broken in the case of ἔφη, to get the neg before it.) 16

ἁμάρτημα —to add to the disaster Gongylus had fallen, so Plutarch relates.

τῇ τάξει —explained by ἐντὸς . . ποιήσας, and causal.

ἐντὸς —i.e. μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων.

ποιήσας —sc. τὴν τάξιν. The usual phrase is ἑντὸς ποιεῖσθαι. The act. is used because he actually drew up (constructed) the line of battle. Contrast ξύλλογον ποιεῖν, of a στρατηγός, with ξύλλογον ποιεῖσθαι, of the men attending.

διανοεῖσθαι οὕτως —to convince themselves that they would find their resources ample, and that they would be guilty of intolerable lack of determination unless.

τῇ μὲν παρασκευῇ )( τῇ δὲ γνώμη?, the material con trasted with the moral resources. A common antithesis. which we should not make so prominent. γνώμῃ goes with ἀξιώσουσι. 23

εἰ μὴ ἀξιώσουσι —unless they mean to bind themselves.

Πελοποννήσιοι . . Δωριῆς, Ἰὠνων . . νησιωτῶν — chiasmus Πελοποννήσιοι is addressed to the Syracusans by their allies, thus reminding them of the origin of which they were very proud. Cf. Theocritus 15.90-92 Συρακοσίαις ἐπιτάσσεις ὡς εἰδῇς καὶ τοῦτο, Κορίνθιαι εἰμὲς ἄνωθεν ὡς καὶ ὁ Βελλεροφῶν· Πελοποννασιστὶ λαλεῦμες· δωρίσδεν δ’ ἔξεστι δοκῶ τοῖς Δωριέεσσι. The Athenians, on the contrary, did not at all care for the title ‘Ionians’

νησιωτῶν —the Syracusans regarded themselves as ἠπειρῶται. Cf. c. 21.

ξυγκλύδων —cf. Livy 22.43 milites mixtos ex conluvione omnium gentium. The word is rare in Attic, but is common in late authors. (Cf. Photius συγκλύδων· συμμίκτων, ἐπηλύδων.)

κρατήσαντες ἐξελάσασθαι —when partic and verb govern a different case, a common object will nearly always follow the construction required by the partic.

ἐξελάσασθαι —the mid., which is unusual, is found also in IV. 35.

εἰ . . μὴ ἐθέλοιεν . . εἶναι —the Recta would be ἐὰν μὴ ἐθέλωσι . . ἐστι, but ἐὰν is future, not iterative. ‘Even if the enemy should hesitate.’

ἐκεῖνοι —used of ‘the enemy,’ as often; sometimes even when a different pronoun is required by strict grammar. 5

περιορᾶν παροικοδομούμενον —the pres. partic. because the details of the building operation are thought of.

ταὐτὸν ἤδη ἐποίει —it would probably come to the same thing whether they fought a series of battles with unbroken success, or did not fight at all. τε . . καὶ are alternative, as often, and the infins. form the subject to ταὐτὸν ἐποίει.

νικᾶν —why could not Nicias have attacked the crosswall if he won a series of victories? Thuc., speaking in his own person, seems to represent Nicias as quite blind to this possibility.

διὰ παντὸς —continually

οὖν —resuming after a long parenthesis. See on c. 42.3.

ἔξω τῶν τειχῶν —i.e. north-west of the κύκλος. With προάγειν ἔξω cf. ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκστρατεύεσθαι ἔξω.

μᾶλλον ἢ πρότερον —and not as previously. Before, they had fought μεταξὺ τῶν τειχισμάτων. (This use of μᾶλλον is a common meiosis, Cf. II. 41.2 οὐ κόμπος μᾶλλον ἢ ἔργων ἀλήθεια.)

προαγαγὼν —as to the exact scene and formation of the battle edd. are unable to agree. The question is of no importance

ἐκ πλαγίου —so as to take the A. left in flank. Contrast κατὰ πρόσωπον I. 106.

δῑ αὐτὸ —Thuc. constantly uses αὐτὸ thus to denote something which he has just described So too αὐτὸ δρᾶν or ποιεῖν are idiomatic.

κατηράχθη —this verb κατ‐αράσσω is often used by Dio Cassius; and is found in other late authors, but with ρρ.

νυκτὶ —words expressing time do not need ἐν. Thuc. extends this rule to words like ἐσβολὴ and πόλεμος, which are quasi-temporal.

ἔφθασαν παροικοδομήσαντες —notice the rule that wíth φθάνω, τυγχάνω and λανθάνω the aor. partic. does not denote past time relatively to the leading verb.

καὶ παρελθόντες —and so they passed. The whole of the passage from this to the end of the c. is an explanation of the words παροικοδομήσαντες.

μηκέτι μήτε —more emphatic than μήτε . . ἔτι.

μήτε . . τε —so neque . . et.

αὐτῶν, ἐκείνους —applying to the same persons, as often in all Attic prose. So hic and ille in Cic. de Fin. 4, 16, 43. 27

ἀπεστερηκέναι . . μὴ —cf. II. 101 ἀπιστοῦντες μὴ ἥξειν. The perf. denotes the completion of the act.

ἀπεστερηκέναι . . μὴ ἂν . . ἀποτειχίσαι —virtually oblique fór οὐκ ἂν ἀποτειχίσειαν.

αἵ τε —answered by καὶ ὁ Γύλιππος below.

καὶ Ἀμπρακιωτῶν —the art. (αἱ) is not repeated, as often in Thuc.; cf. c. 14 τά τε ὄντα καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα. 6

τὸ λοιπὸν —with τοῦ ὲγ. τείχους.

μέχρι τοῦ Εὐρυήλου —it was carried so far to prevent an enemy from approaching by the western ascent to Epipolae.

ἐς τὴν ἄλλην Σ. ἐπὶ ς. ᾤχετο —Cf. Herod. VII. 193 ἐπὶ τὸ κῶας ἔπλεον ἐς Αἶαν .

στρατιάν τε —answered by καὶ τῶν πόλεων.

καὶ ναυτικὴν —intending to collect one both naval and military.

μὴ πρόθυμος ἦν =τὰς μὴ π. οὔσας, any that were not (then) eager. Cf. [Dem.] 11, 4 τῶν φίλων . . . τοὺς δὲ μηκέτι προθύμους εἶναι συναγωνίστας.

ἄλλοι —exclusive use, πρέσβεις being contrasted with Gylippus.

τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν —for ᾧ ἂν τρόπῳ; unusual order, found also in [Dem.] 47, 33 τρόπῳ ᾧ ἂν δυνώμεθα

ἐπιμεταπεμπομένων —sending for fresh troops. Cf. ἑπιπέμπειν c. 15.

ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπειρῶντο —so c. 51; Dem. 51.5 ἐπεπλήρωτό μοι καὶ πάντες ἑωρᾶθ’ ὑμεῖς ἀναπειρωμένην τὴν ναῦν. Diod. 13, 8 τὰς ἀναπείρας ἐποιοῦντο. The technical expression for practising manœuvres.

ἐπέρρωντο —opposite of ἀρρωστεῖν. Both have a physical and a moral sense. Cf. II. 8 ἔρρωντο ἐς τὸν πόλεμον .

ἔπεμπε . . ἀγγέλλων —so 2.81 ἔπεμπον κελεύοντες. The partic. is generally in the nom. with πέμπω in Thuc. The imperf. here is probably intended to represent the details of an elaborate act (as often with πέμπω): thus it will suit both πολλάκις μὲν and μάλιστα δὲ. See c. 3.1 on λέγοντα .

καθ’ ἕκαστα —a prepositional phrase replacing the object (of ἀγγέλλων), as often with ἐπὶ πολύ.

δεινοῖς —regular word for the difficulties of war.

εἰ μὴ . . μεταπέμψουσιν —the construction, εἰ with fut., expresses merely the logical dependence of the apodosis on the protasis, whereas ἢν with subj. shows that the speaker hopes or fears the fulfilment of the condition. Thus Thuc. here puts the matter in a scientific form.

εἶναι —not ἔσεσθαι. Cf. Lys. 21.25 ἡγουμένους αἰσχρὸν εἶναι εἰ ἀναγκασθησόμεθα. (The logical expression is sacrificed to effective rhetoric)

κατὰ τοῦ λέγειν ἀδυνασίαν —the omission of τὴν after κατὰ shows that Nicias did not know that they actually were incompetent.

ἀδυνασίαν —this form, in place of the commoner ἀδυναμία, is found in Herod., and was perhaps used also by Antiphon.

γιγνόμενοι —notice that in expressing the two causes, Thuc. varies the construction ( κατὰ and causal participle).

πρὸς χάριν —cf. II. 65.8 πρὸς ἡδονήν τι λέγειν, and πρὸς ὀργήν τι ἀντειπεῖν. The phrases are useful.

τὰ ὄντα —the facts.

ἐπιστολήν — litteras. In Lat. down to the empire epistula means a private letter. (Contrast the verbosa et grandis epistula from Capreae.)

ἐν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ —in the hands of, i e. through. Cf Aeschin. 2.104 ἐν ἡμῖν ἀποκινδυνεύειν. Common both in prose and verse.

μαθόντας =μαθεῖν καὶ—so that μάλιστα belongs to μαθόντας as well as to βουλεύσασθαι.

βουλεύσασθαι —come to a decision.

καὶ —and so, a use frequent also in Aeschylus.

φέροντες —as in Soph. Aj. 735 ἥκει φέρων Αἴαντος ἡμῖν πρᾶξιν.

διὰ φυλακῆς . . ἔχων —cf. διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν, δῑ ὀργῆς ἔ. etc.=ξυνεχῶς φυλάσσων. τὰ κατὰ τὸ ς. is object of ἔχων. Superintended the army by keeping it in a state of defence instead of running self-imposed risks. So Dio Cassius 47.36 αὐτοί τε διὰ φυλακῆς μᾶλλον ἢ διὰ κινδύνων τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐποιοῦντο, taken from this passage. Isaeus 7.14 ὃν ἤσκει καὶ δῑ ἐπιμελείας εἶχεν.

δῑ ἑκουσίων κινδύνων —Classen supplies ἔχων; Stahl takes the words with ἐπεμέλετο as an adverbial phrase. Either way will do, since ἔχων is itself almost equivalent to an adv. here, implying continuance.

ἐπεμέλετο —absolute.

Περδίκκου —Perdiccas II., son of Alexander the Philhellene. His shifty policy gave great trouble to Athens in the war. (1) Before 432 he was in alliance with Athens. (2) In 432 he encouraged the revolt of Potidaea. because Athens was in alliance with his brother and enemy Philip (3) In 431 he was reconciled to Athens. (4) In 429 Athens projected an expedition against him, but was unable to undertake it. (5) In 424 he encouraged Brasidas to invade Thrace. (6) In 424 autumn, owing to differences with Brasidas, he made terms with the Athenians, but lent no assistance. (7) In 418 winter, he again joined Sparta, after the battle of Mantiuea. The Athenians blockaded him in 417. (8) He is now again on terms with Athens, but Thuc. has omitted to explain this new change. The condition of Macedon was much improved after the accession of Archelaus in 413

ἐπ’ Ἀμφίπολιν —founded 437 by Hagnon (strategus 440, 430, 429). It passed over to Sparta in 424, and was never regained by Athens, though it should have been given back under the terms of the Peace of Nicias. In 358 Philip added it to Macedon. It was the central city of one of the four confederacies into which Rome divided Macedon in 168, after the fall of Perscus 4

τὴν μὲν πόλιν οὐχ εἷλεν —the neg. put first in parataxis, as often when the chief object of an action fails; cf V. 6 Σταγείρῳ προσβάλλει . . . καὶ οὐχ εἷλεν, Γαληψὸν δὲ λαμβάνει.

ἥκοντες —came in due course. Note that ἥκω has the meaning (1) to appear duly—in court, of litigants, (2) to return from an errand, (3) to reach one's destination.

ὅσα τε ἀπὸ —the oral message. ἀπὸ describes the means. Cf. Aristoph. Eq. 539 ἀπὸ κραμβοτάτου στόματος μάττων ἐπινοίας; Vesp. 656 λογίσαι μὴ ψήφοις, ἀλλ’ ἀπὸ χειρός.

εἴρητο Cf. c. 4.7 .

ἐπηρώτα —why is the indic. used here? Probably because Thuc. refers only to one occasion, though many asked questions on that occasion.

ὁ γραμματεὺς —sc. τοῦ δήμου. Cf. Arist. Ath. Pol. c. 54 χειροτονεῖ δὲ καὶ ὁ δῆμος γραμματέα τὸν ἀναγνωσόμενον αὐτῷ καὶ τῆ? βουλῇ, καὶ οὗτος οὐδενός ἐστι κύριος ἀλλὰ τοῦ ἀναγνῶναι.

τοῖς Ἀθηναἰοις —i.e. in the ecclesia. Probably, if we may infer from the decision arrived at, a special summons (κατάκλησις) had been issued to the country population, among which Nicias found his chief support.

δηλοῦσαν —regular word with ἐπιστολή, ψήφισμα, νόμος, στήλη.

τοιάδε —the letter is in the form of a set speech. (It is entitled in F (Augustanus) πρὸς τοὺς ἐν Ἀθήναις Νικίου ἐπιστολή. Cf. T. Its full description would run, according to the rules of Hermogenes, which are followed throughout the rbetorical scholia of Thuc., ἠ στἀσις πραγματικἠ, λογική (or ἄγραφος ), συμβουλευτικοῦ εἴδους, κεφάλαιον ἔχουσα τὸ συμφέρον. Cf. the third letter of Isocrates, written after Chaeronea to Philip.)

ἐν ἄλλαις —here ἐν contains the meaning on account of, ‘thanks to,’ which it often suggests, just as in Eng. ‘we could not find our way in the dark.’ Cf. on c. 8.2.

μαθόντας —cf. τί μαθών, παθών.

ἐν ᾧ —describes the circumstances, as very often in Thuc. in quo sumus statu. Cf. on c. 29.4.

βουλεύσασθαι —to come to a decision—again ingressive.

κρατησάντων γὰρ —the διήγησις (narratio). (This excellently illustrates Aristot. Aristot. Rh. 3.16.11 ἐν δὲ δημηγορίᾳ ἥκιστα διήγησίς ἐστιν, ὅτι περὶ τῶν μελλόντων οὐθεὶς διηγεῖται ἀλλ’ ἐάν περ διήγησις ᾖ, τῶν γενομένων ἔσται, ἵν’ άναμνησθέντες ἐκείνων βέλτιον βουλεύσωνται περὶ τῶν ὕστερον.)

μάχαις ταῖς πλείοσι —why this order? to emphasize the adjective. Cf. II. 2.2 ἄνδρας τοὺς ὑπεναντίους.

Συρακοσίους —Classen notes on I. 108 that Thuc. constructs κρατεῖν with accus. when it is connected with μάχῃ or μαχόμενος (or when one of them is clearly imphed in context); otherwise with gen. This rule is generally observed, for κρατεῖν with gen.=κρείσσων γενέσθαι. Cf. Dem. 8.32 ὃν κρατήσαντας τοῖς ὅπλοις; Dem. 19.319 Φωκέας ἐκράτησε (sc. μάχῃ ). [Demosth.] 13.17 ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις κρατεῖν τῶν ἐχθρῶν is bad.

ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπέμφθημεν —this remark is mtended as a defence, by reminding the Athenians of the original plan of campaign. Hence ἐπέμφθημεν, not ἐστρατευσαμεν.

ἔκ τε . . . καὶ ἀπὸ —one of the commonest interchanges of prepositions, esp. in Isocrates. In some uses ἐκ and ἀπὸ are different; e.g. of descent, ἐκ is used of direct , ἀπὸ of indirect descent. Even as used here, ἐκ generally expresses the more important or immediate cause.

ἔστιν ὧν —in the nom. plur. always εἰσὶν (οἳ, αἳ); in oblique cases always ἔστιν (ὧν, οἶς, etc) in Thuc., except when words intervene, as in c. 25 ἧσαν τῶν σταυρῶν οὕς.

νικᾶται . . . ἀνεχωρήσαμεν —for the hist. pres. followed by aor., cf. on c. 3.4. (Notice the extreme simplicity and beauty of the style here.)

τῇ δ’ ὑστεραίᾳ —sc. μάχῃ, as in III. 91. In I. 44.1 ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ = in the next day's assembly; and so in v. 46.1. But when no noun precedes, ἡμέρα is meant.

ἀκοντισταῖς βιασθέντες —in c. 43 βιασθέντες ὑπ’ αὐτῶν The dat. is not ‘agent,’ but that used in military and naval phrases, of the general's παρασκευή. Hence ὑπ’ αὐτοῦ is to be supplied. Note also that with βιάζομαι and all verbs denoting force , ὑπὸ and gen. is common with non-personal agents, as βιασθεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς νόσου. See on c. 13.2 .

πλῆθος —of superior numbers, as often.

ἡσυχάζομεν —regular word to denote abstention from hostile operations. So quiescere.

μέρος τι —the addition of τι indefinitely extends the force of μέρος.

ὥστε μὴ εἶναι —the infin. with ὥστε here expresses something which has actually occurred (it being the natural result), as in II. 4 τὰς πύλας ἔκλῃσεν ὥστε μηδὲ ταύτῃ ἔτι ἔξοδον εἶναι. The more energetic indic. construction with ὤστε is far commoner in Xenophon and the Orators than in Herod., Thuc. and Tragedy.

περιτειχίσαι αὐτούς —he might have said περιτείχισιν αὐτῶν. Cf. IV. 131 οὐκ ἐγίγνετο σφῶν περιτείχισις.

ἐπελθὼν —attack, here with accus., παρατείχισμα being common object to partic. and verb.

l. 22

Ξυμβέβηκε . . . δοκοῦντας —with ξυμβαίνει and infin. either dat. or accus. is used, dat. when the case precedes the infin, as II. 61 ξυνέβη ὑμῖν πεισθῆναι ἀκεραίοις

τε —and so, giving the result of preceding details.

αὐτοὺς μᾶλλον —ourselves instead

ὅσα γε — dumtaxat, as far as concerns, as in IV. 48 ὅσα γε κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον τόνδε . Dem. 21.18 τούτων, ὅσα γ’ ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γέγονεν; Plato.Rep.V 14 ὅσα ἄνθρωποι. Thuc. very often omits parts of εἰμί, γίγνομαι after ὅσος .

τοῦτο πάσχειν —passive of τοῦτο ποιεῖν or δρᾶν, the regular phrases for referring to an action just described: I. 5.2; 6.5; II 11.8; 49.5 .

οὐδὲ γὰρ —here begins the description of the difficulties of Nicias.

τῆς χώρας —put in a prominent position because it further emphasizes ὅσα γε κατὰ γῆν. Thuc. constantly inverts the natural order for the sake of emphasis, esp. the order of the gen.

ἐπὶ πολὺ —used here of spacc, less often of time.

πεπόμφασι δὲ καὶ . . . καὶ . . . οἴχεται —chiasmus is very commion in Thuc., and is quite a feature of his style.

τὰς μὲν . . . ἀπὸ δὲ τῶν —the iegular, but not universal order when a preposition occurs with ὁ μὲν or ὁ δὲ is that the particle should follow the preposition immediately; e.g. Andoc. I. 29 περὶ μὲν τῶν μυστηρίων . . . περὶ δὲ τῶν ἀναθημάτων. In VI. 76.4 οἱ μὲν is in a remarkable position.

καὶ πείσων . . . καὶ στρατιὰν —the double καὶ marks the balancing of the clauses, as in ὥσπερ καὶ . . . οὕτω καὶ.

τῶν τειχῶν . . πειρᾶν —the act. and mid. are equally used in this sense, II. 81 ὅπως πειρῷντο τοῦ τείχους. (Eustathius on Hom. Δ 166 τὸ πειρᾶσθαι παθητικὸν Ἀττικοὶ λέγουσιν ἀντί τοῦ ποιεῖσθαι ἀπόπειραν. Ὅμηρος μέντοι τὸ πειρᾶσθαι πειρᾶν ένταῦθα φησὶν ἐνεργητικῶς . . . και Θουκυδίδης δὲ τῶν τειχῶν ἡμῶν πειρᾶν.) See also on c. 32.1.

δεινὸν . . . δόξῃ —passive of δεινὸν ποιεῖσθαι to consider incredible. δεινὸν ποιεῖν denotes the outward expression of surprise, and is often used by Herod. and Thuc. But often in the Orators δεινὸν ποιεῖν means to act disgracefully; as Lys 3. 7, 26.

ὅτι καὶ —for the ellipse after ὅτι, cf. Dem. 47.41 ἃ πεπονθὼς ἧν εἶπον καὶ ὅτι εἰσπράττων τῇ πόλει τὰ σκεύη.

κἀκεῖνοι —ἐκεῖνος of ‘the enemy,’ as c. 6.1. In. II. 11.6 ὅταν ὁρῶσιν ἡμᾶς δῃοῦντάς τε καὶ τἀκείνων φθείροντας, we expect τὰ ἑαυτῶν, but Thuc. makes Archidamus refer to the enemy as ἐκεῖνοι

τὸ μὲν πρῶτον —though at first.

ἤκμαζε . . . ξηρότητι —cf. II. 20 ἀκμάζοντες νεότητι.

σωτηρίᾳ —soundness.

νῦν δὲ —the contrast of Past with Piescnt is among the commonest of rhetorical deviccs. Aristotle remarks that the efficacy of Antithesis results from its having the appearance of being a Proof; Bain that it is a consequence of the law that ‘we are affected only by change of impression.’

ἀνελκύσαντας διαψῦξαι —cf. Herod. VII. 59 τὰς νέας ἀνέψυχον ἀνελκύσαντες; Xen. Hell. I. 5.10 ἀνελκύσας τὰς ναῦς ἡσυχίαν ἦγεν ἐπισκευάζων καὶ ἀναψύχων.

καὶ ἔτι πλείους —the corrective use of καί, as Demosthenes in the third Philippic, ἀπόλωλε καὶ νενόσηκεν ἡ Ἑλλάς.

φανεραὶ δέ εἰσιν —cf. δῆλός εἰμι. A periphrasis of ποιῶ , εἰμι, or γίγνομαι with an adj. is very common, esp. in Herodotus. See Stein on Herod. V. 63.5 Cf. Isocr. Paneg. 122 πολλοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκδότους ἐποίησαν.

μᾶλλον —i e. ἢ ἡμῖν, ellipse with the comparative being very common.

ἐξουσία —the idiom ἐξουσία ἐστι or γίγνεται with plain infin. occurs frequently.

ἐκ πολλῆς περιουσίας —as the result of a great superiority, i.e. ‘if we had a great numerical superiority.’ For the use of ἐκ cf. II. 62.5 ἡ ξύνεσις τὴν τόλμαν ἐκ τοῦ ὑπέρφρονος ἐχυρωτέραν παρέχεται. The phrase ἐκ περιουσίας occurs also in VIII. 45 ; Dem. 18.3; Dem. 45.67.

καὶ μὴ ἀναγκαζομένοις —on the use of the partic. here sec note on c. 18.1.

εἰ . . . ἀφαιρήσομεν —see on c. 8.1.

τῆς τηρήσεως —the use of these verbal nouns in ‐της and ‐σις, so common in Thuc., is a means of giving dignity to the expression.

ἔτι νῦν —both ἔτι νῦν and νῦν ἔτι are found. φθείρεσθαι is the opposite of αὐξάνεσθαι.

διὰ φρυγανισμὸν —cf. lignatum, pabulatum, aquatum ire.

ἀπολλυμένων . . . αὐτομολοῦσι —anaioluthon, the partic. being exchanged for a finite verb, as in II. 47.3 λεγόμενον μὲν . . . οὐ μέντοι ἐμνημονεύετο. (Anacoluthon is common in Thuc, but many falsely explain the solecisms that appear in the vulgate as anacolutha.)

ἐς ἀντίπαλα καθεστήκαμεν —in II. 89 ἀντίπαλος is contrasted with ὑποδεέστερος. As long as the fleet was intact, the attendants had felt the superiority of the Athenian force: but now the two sides were to contend on equal terms.

ὑπὸ . . . μισθοῦ . . . ἐπαρθέντες —the verbs which in prose commonly have ὑπὸ with things are such as νικῶμαι, βλάπτομαι, διαφθείρομαι, ἀναγκάζομαι, ἡττῶμαι, πείθομαι. Lysias also uses ἐπαίρομαι with ὑπό. The thing so used must be such as can easily be personified, e.g. (1) natural phenomena, χειμών, ἄπλοια, σεισμός, (2) external circumstances , κίνδυνος, συμφορά, πληγαί, δεσμοί, κέρδος, χρήματα, νόμος, (3) emotions, ἡδονή, φθόνος, (4) words that imply a person, λόγοι, πράγματα, δύναμις, when the person is often inserted (as ὑπὸ τῆς τοῦ ῥήτορος δεινότητος), and all the topics of rhetorie, as ὑπὸ τῶν εἰκότων, ὑπὸ τοῦ δικαίου. The construction is optional in these cases; e.g. Isocr. 5.40 says τὰς πόλεις ὡμαλισμένας ὑπὸ τῶν συμφορῶν, but 6, 65 ὡμαλισμένοι ταῖς συμφοραῖς .

παρὰ γνώμην —(1) here ‘unexpectedly’; (2) may mean also ‘unreasonably.’

ἐπ’ αὐτομολίας προφάσει —taking the opportunity afforded by desertion is probably the meaning, as perhaps in Dem. 16.25 ἐπὶ τῇ προφάσει τῇ Πλαταιῶν καὶ Θεσπιῶν τὰς οὔσας πόλεις ἀναιρεθείσας περυδεῖν. Elsewhere ἑπὶ προφάσει means on pretext. Some, he says, desert to the enemy; others simply go away. (Classen says ‘on any opportunity of deserting’; but πρόφασις certainly does not mean an opportunity of doing something, but an opportunity which is afforded by something.)

ὡς ἕκαστοι δύνανται —as they find a chance, i.e. without joining the enemy. Hence he adds πολλὴ ἡ Σικελία. Cf. II. 17.3 ὡς ἕκαστός που ἐδύνατο.

πολλὴ δ’ ἡ Σικελία —the remark has more point than appears at first sight; for there must have been many in the Ecclesia who still had a very vague notion of the size of Sicily.

Ὑκκαρικὰ —Hyccara (now Carini) was a Sicanian town between Phoenician Panormus and Elymian Segesta. The Athenians captured it shortly after arriving in Sicily. Lais, who became one of the most famous and most exacting of the Beauties of antiquity, was captured there and sent to Corinth. A pathetic episode in the life of Aleibiades is his love for Timandra, mother of Lais.

ἀντεμβιβάσαι ὑπὲρ σφῶν —cf. Herod. III. 14 ὑπὲρ ἀνδρὸς ἑκάστου δέκα ἀνταπόλλυσθαι.

τὴν ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ ναυτικοῦ —cf. Arrian.Anab. I. 2, 7 τὴν ἀ. τῆς διώξεως ἀφείλοντο.

ἐπισταμένοις δ’ ὐμῖν γράφω —you do not need to be told that. Both in Greek and, still oftener, in Lat. a 1st pers. sing. is used where we prefer to avoid it. With the perf. in Gk., the impers. pass. is preferred to the 1st pers. sing. act.

βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος —generally taken to mean the efficient part of a ship's crew is small; and this accords well with the next clause. But the Schol. says οὐ πολλῷ χρόνῳ ἀκμάζει ἡ ναυτικὴ δύναμις, with which agrees Plutarch, Caes. 40 παρεσκευασμένος ἄριστα πᾶσι πρὸς τὸν χρόνον ἠξίου τρίβειν καὶ μαραίνειν τὴν τῶν πολεμίων ἀκμὴν βραχεῖαν οὖσαν. The Schol. is probably right, though βραχὺς in Thuc often = ‘small.’

καὶ ὀλίγοι τῶν ναυτῶν —it is but few of the sailors that both start the ship, and (then) keep rowing (all the time). ἐξορμᾶν means that the sailors start ‘working,’ ξυνέχειν that only few of them continue to work, ξυνεχῶς τὴν εἰρεσίαν ποιοῦνται. Too many of those who work at first ‘get slack’ after a short time: others reserve themselves at the start.

τούτων —Thuc. is very fond of putting the ‘partitive’ τούτων first in the sentence.

πάντων ἀπορώτατον —note the idiom. Dem. 8.35 πάντων ἀνθρώπων φαυλότατοι; Dem. 8.58 ἀνοητότατος πάντων; Dem. 9.10 πάντων εὐηθέστατοι; Dem. 3.16 πάντων αἴσχιστα; Dem. 3.31 πάντων ἀνδρειότατον.

τό τε μὴ . . . εἶναι . . . καὶ ὅτι —a clause with ὅτι is often combined with a clause in different construction, e.g. Dem. 19.203 ἐπιδεῖξαι καὶ ὅτι ψεύσεται καὶ τὴν δικαίαν ἥτις ἐστὶν ἀπολογία.

χαλεπαὶ . . . ἄρξαι —cf. VI. 42 εὐκοσμότεροι καὶ ῥᾴους ἄρχειν .

αἱ ὑμέτεραι φύσεις —the common complaint that with Athenian freedom was mingled ἀταξία. The opponents of democracy ascribed the defect to ignorance. It was, however, mainly caused by the too rapid development of the Athenian polity after the Persian wars; the people acquired democratic institutions before they had mastered the lesson of obedience. Only exceptional men like Themistocles and Pericles were able to remedy the defect.

ἐπιπληρωσόμεθα —the fut. expressing possibility after the rel. in primary sequence, the only construction in Attie prose, except where the delib. subj. is possible. Homer uses also the subj., generally with κέν.

ἀφ’ ὦν . . . γίγνεσθαι —both the men that we have and the men that we lose come of necessity from the men that we brought out with us.

τά τε ὄντα refers to ὀλίγοι τῶν ναυτῶν above: though but few of the sailors in the ship are really efficient, yet we cannot turn the crews out and supply their places with others —or, if we do, we must draw on the reserves we brought; but they are badly needed to supply our losses.

τε . . . καὶ —two distinct things are here joined without repetition of the art., as in Eur. Ion 7 τά τ’ ὄντα καὶ μέλλοντα θεσπίζων ἀεί.

καὶ ἀπαναλισκόμενα —refers to βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ πληρώματος above. Sickness, exhaustion, and death remove many men in the crews: such losses represent a dead loss on the total sent out, since there is no source of supply except the reserves Notice (1) the chiastie arrangement here—βραχεῖα ἀκμὴ . . . ὀλίγοι . . . τὰ ὄντα . . . ἀπαναλισκόμενα—of which Thuc. is very fond. (2) the neut., used because totals are being dealt with.

αἱ γὰρ νῦν —for αἱ γὰρ πόλεις αἱ νῦν οὖσαι ξυμ.

Νάξος καὶ Κατάνη —Naxos, though the oldest Greek city in Sicily, was never important. It was destroyed in 403 B.C Pausamas says that no traces of it remained in his day (a slight exaggeration). The site is now oceupied by an orange grove. Cataha was a colony from Naxos. It is an uninteresting town, the aneient remains having been buried by earthquakes and volcanic eruptions; but it is now the second city in Sicily in point of size.

ἓν ἔτι . . . ὥστε —i.e. ‘if they only succeed in gaining over the Italian citres’; the ὥστε clause being epexegetic of ἓν. Cf. Herod. V. 31 εἰ γὰρ τοῦτό γε δοκέει ὑμῖν εἶναι χρηστὸν ὥστε τυραννεύεσθαι τὰς πόλις; Theocr. 14, 58 εἰ δ’ οὕτως ἄρα τοι δοκεῖ ὥστ’ ἀποδαμεῖν.

τῆς Ἰταλίας —already before the Peloponnesian war both the Athenians and Spartans had made alliances in Italy, by which they understood only the S.W. corner of Italy, from Heraclea on the east and the Laus on the west.

ὁρῶντα . . . ἐπιβοηθούντων —cf. II. 25 ὄντι ἀσθενεῖ καὶ ἀνθρώπων οὐκ ἐνόντων.

ἐν ᾧ —see c. 11.1 .

διαπεπολεμήσεται —they will bring the war to an end without striking a blow.

ἡδἰω μὲν ἂν —Demosthenes, in the 3rd Olynthiac, says that the old orators, Aristides, Pericles, Nicias, used to speak the truth, not try to please. So Thuc. says of Pericles. Cf. Livy 22.38 contio verior quam gratior.

ἤν τι . . . μὴ —should the event fail to correspond with the pleasant antieipation aroused in you by the evil habit some orators have of speaking πρὸς χάριν, πρὸς ἡδονήν. 24

ἀσφαλέστερον —strikes the key-note of Nicias' policy.

ὡς ἐφ’ ἃ ἤλθομεν —and so, as concerns the original object of the expedition, consider that, etc. ὡς with gen. abs. is often used thus with διανοοῦμαι and such words See M.T. 918. Plat. Rep. 523C ὡς ἐγγύθεν ὁρμωμένους λέγοντός μου διανοοῦ.

οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε —cf. Dem. 18.291 οὐχ ὡς ἂν εὔνους καὶ δίκαιος πολίτης ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην. A patriot's part is to deplore the misfortune of his country, but not to attack the statesmen unless they are really culpable.

ἀνταρκούντων . . . δέον —the change is necessary because the 2nd partie. is impersonal. Cf. 25, 9 ὄντων . . . διαπεπολεμησόμενον.

μεταπέμπειν . . . ἐπιπέμπειν — paronomasia, as II. 60.1 κακοτυχῶν ἐν εὐτυχούσῃ , 98.3 ἀπεγίγνετο μὲν οὐδέν, προσεγίγνετο δέ. (It is one of the σχήματα λέξεως first taught by Gorgias.)

ἀδύνατος —recalling the technical term for οἱ τὸ σῶμα πεπηρωμένοι at Athens.

πολλὰ . . . ὑμᾶς εὖ ἐποίησα —rather unusual for πολλὰ ὑμᾶς ἀγαθὰ ἐποίησα. Dem. 19.41, quoting Philip, ἡλίκα τὴν πόλιν εὖ ποιήσω ; Dem. 19.220 μείζον’ ἢ κατ’ Ἀμφίπολιν εὖ ποιήσειν τὴν πόλιν. It was one of the stock devices of orators to dwell on their services to the state.

l 15.

μέλλετε —sc. πράσσειν.

μὴ ἐς ἀναβολὰς πράσσετε —Herod. VIII. 21 οὐκέτι ἐς ἀναβολὰς ἐποιεῦντο τὴν ἀναχώρησιν; Isocr. Ep. 1.10 δηλώσομεν δ’ οὐκ εἰς ἀναβολάς Cf. οὐκ ἐς μακράν.

τὰ μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ —help in S.

δῑ ὀλίγου ποριουμένων —will quiekly obtain. δῑ ὀλίγου is common in Thuc., both temporal and local. Dem. 19.186 χρόνος ἐν ᾧ ποριοῦνται ὧν ἂν δέωνται.

σχολαίτερον μέν —sc. ποριουμένων.

τὰ μὲν λήσουσιν —sc. πορισάμενοι, and so with φθήσονται. There is anacoluthon here, the partie. ποριουμένων being replaced by the finite λήσουσι, φθήσονται. Cf. II. 47.3 λεγόμενον μὲν . . . οὐ μέντοι ἐμνημον εύετο

παρέλυσαν —released. Cf. Herod. VII. 38 τῶν παίδων ἕνα παράλυσον τῆς στρατηίης. Lucian has παραλύειν τῆς δίκης.

αὐτοῦ ἐκεῖ —pleonasm with αὐτοῦ is common: e.g. Homer Il 19.330 αὐτοῦ ενὶ Τροιῃ; Od. 20.159 αὐτοῦ κατὰ δώματ’ . Herod. I. 82 αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇσι Θυρέῃσι . Plat..Alc. 1 109b αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ Εὐρώπῃ.

δύο —thus the places of Alcibiades and Lamachus were filled, but it was a great error to restore the ‘debating club’ method of command. Cf. Macaulay on Argyle's expedition, E. H. I. 5.

μόνος ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τ. —the chief emphasis is on μόνος. Take ταλαιπωρεῖν to mean exceptional distress as usual. It is often used of sickness and of the hardships of a protracted or unfortunate expedition.

Ἀθηναίων . . . ἐκ καταλόγου —the fourth class ( θῆτες) was excluded from the muster-roll, and regularly served as ἐπιβάται, being exceptionally employed, ἔξω τοῦ καταλόγου, in the infantry.

Δημοσθένη —his record: (1) 426 B.C., Aetolian expedition, which, after a bad start, resulted in the total defeat of the Aetolians and Ambracrots at Argos Amphilochicum: (2) 425 B.C., established Pylus: (3) 424 B.C., successful expedition against Megara, but subsequent failure in Boeotia. He had figured as prosecutor in the courts.

Εὐρυμέδοντα —his record: (1) 427 B.C., commanded the fleet sent to Coreyra, but took no action: (2) 426 B.C., commanded the land foree in a successful attack on Boeotia: (3) 425 B.C., commanded the first fleet sent to Sicily by Athens, and, on the way, aided in the extermination of the Corcyrean aristocrats. For his want of suceess in Sicily in 425 he was fined.

ἥξει —see c. 1.4 .

ἐπιμέλεια ἔσται —so Demosth. proem 54 ἡ ἡμετέρα γέγον’ ἐπιμέλεια. Periphrases of abstract nouns with εἰμί, γίγνομαι are very idiomatic.

ὑπομένων —remaining behind, esp. in a place of danger or duty. Hence often used by litigants who might have avoided trial by flight: also of troops in aetion.

στρατιὰν ἐπαγγέλλων —cf. III. 16 κατὰ πόλεις ἐπήγγελλον νεῶν πλῆθος. Technieal word for sending out a formal notice, which may amount to a command. Cf. περιαγγέλλω .

αὐτόθεν —from Attica.

πέμπουσι —see on c. 3.1. So pergo is constantly used in hist. pres.

περὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον —this system of cruising was started by Pericles, it being impossible for Athens to spare sufficient troops for an invasion of the Pel.

φυλάσσοιεν μηδένα . . . περαιοῦσθαι — M.T 724 ‘verbs of caution may be followed by an infin. (with or without μή), which sometimes has the art.’

τὰ ἐν τῇ Σ. βελτίω —sc. εἶναι. ἀγγέλλω ordinarily follows the same rule as λέγω , i e. it takes ὅτι, etc., and moods when it implies no command; infin. when it implies command: but Thuc. does not keep strictly to these rules ἀγγέλλω sometimes takes partic. on analogy of verbs of showing. Demosthenes has Φίλιππος ἠγγέλθη ἀσθενῶν.

πέμψιν . . ποιήσασθαι —for the periphrases of noun and ποιοῦμαι and its pass. γίγνομαι, see Index. προτέραν refers to the sending of Gylippus and Pythen.

ἐν ὁλκάσι —order perverted for the sake of emphasis, as often. The sending of troops in merchant ships was unusual.

παρεσκευάζοντο . . . ἀποστελοῦντες —the omission of ὡς with παρασκευάζομαι is very rare except in Thue., who has it several times. Xen. Hel. IV. 1.41 παρεσκευάζετο πορευσόμενος.

τῷ αὐτῷ τ. —i.e. ἐν ὁλκάσι, with πέμψοντες .

ναῦς —put first for the sake of the antithesis with ἐν ὁλκάσι. So in II. 7 πρὸς ταῖς αὐτοῦ ὑπαρχούσαις ἐξ Ἰταλίας καὶ Σικελίας τοῖς τἀκείνων ἐλομένοις ναῦς ἐπετάχθη διακοσίας ποιεῖσθαι, where ἐξ Ἰταλίας καὶ Σ. ought to follow τοῖς, but is put first to eontrast it with αὐτοῦ .

ὅπως . . . ἀποπειράσωσι . . . κωλύοιεν —as the two forms are equally correct, we sometimes find both in the same sentence.—Goodivm.

τὴν ἐν τῇ Ν. φυλακήν —the station was first established under Phormio in the autumn of 430 in order to close the mouth of the Corinthian Gulf. Trans. ‘against the ships stationed at N.’

αὐτῶν —should be σφῶν.

πρὸς τὴν σφετέραν ἀντίταξιν —by having to watch their line of war-ships which would be opposing them; i.e. the attention which the A. would have to bestow on the Cor. triremes would give the merchant ships a chance.

παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ —this epanaphora of παρασκευά‐ ζομαι completes the account of the preparations on the part of (1) Demosthenes, (2) the Corinthians and Lac., (3) the Lac. Cf. 2.7 οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι παρεσκευάζοντο, παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ Αακεδαιμόνιοι.

τὴν . . . ἐσβολὴν —there had been no invasion of Attica since 425.

ὥσπερ τε προεδέδοκτο . . . ἐναγόντων —the circumstantial partic. is joined with any expression of similar import in another construction; in accordance with their own previous determination and at the instigation of. Thus the peaec of Nicias was finally breaking down after some eight years of half peace.

ἐπειδὴ ἐπυνθάνοντο —sc. the Cor. and Syr.

τὴν . . . βοήθειαν ἐς τὴν Σικελίαν —Cf. II. 52 ἡ ξυγκομιδὴ ἐκ τῶν ἀγρῶν; Herod. III. 7 οἱ τὴν ἐσβολὴν ταύτην παρασκευάσαντες ἐς Αἱγύπτον; V. 63 ὁ πρῶτος στόλος ἐκ Αακεδαίμονος. This omission of art. before the prep. is common with verbal substantives. If the prep. and case precedes the art., as in καθ’ ἡμέραν ἡ τέρψις (cf. on c. 17.4) II. 38.1, the object is to produce antithesis

δὴ —giving the actual reason, as in V. 85 al.

προσκείμενος ἐδίδασκε —urgently advised them.

Δεκέλειαν —it commands the road from Athens to Oropus, and thus to Euboea, whence came a great part of the corn supplies of Athens. Of similar strategical importance were Phyle and Oenoe.

προτέρῳ —the Archidamian war.

Πλάταιαν —it was an ally of Athens since 520 B.C. III. 68.5.

πρότερον —the thirty years' truce, 445 B.C.

ἐθέλωσι —the form θέλω is archaic, and in Attic prose occurs only in the phrase ἢν θεὸς θέλη?.

διδόναι δίκας —submit to a judicial decision; contrast δίκην δοῦναι .

εἰκότως —deservedly. Cf. εἰκός ἐστι=decet.

ἐνεθυμοῦντο —began to think over—i.e. began to think it had been deserved.

τὴν περὶ Πύλον ξυμφορὰν —in 425 B.C.

Ἐπιδαύρου = E. Limera, in Laconia. There are ruins of the town. The A. had ravaged it in 414, and thus broken the terms of the peace.

Πρασιῶν —also in Laconia, and ravaged at the same time as Epidaurus. It had been destroyed by the A. in 430. It suffered severely, and its fate is a proof how effective the method of Pericles was.

τῶν κατὰ τὰς σπονδὰς ἀ. —about disputed points in the treaty of 421, after περί του

ἐπιτρέπειν —Pollux says ἡ δίαιτα (arbitration) ἐκαλεῖτο ἐπιτροπή.

τότε δὴ —co-ordinate with ἐπειδὴ above, introducing the decisive moment.

σφίσι —the subject of the perf. or pluperf. pass. not being personal, the agent is necessarily in dative.

ἡμάρτητο —cf. Plat. Rep. 544D ἡμαρτημένας πόλεις.

τὸ αὐτὸ —rendering τὸ παρανόμημα still clearer. The sentence of which this section consists is in every way a model of style, and will repay careful attention.

περιεστάναι —shifted round like a wheel, as Cicero says of politics orbis reipublicae cst convcrsus (ad At. II. 9)

σίδηρον —iron tools.

περιήγγελλον —as in II. 85 ναῦς περιήγγελλον κατὰ πόλεις. We expect παρασκευάζεσθαι or πέμψαι to follow.

ἐπιτειχισμόν —of Deeelea.

ἐπικουρίαν —esp. used of a foreign (or mercenary) force.

προσηνάγκαζον —se. πορίζειν, the same brachylogy as with διανοοῦμαι V. 80 , οἶμαι c. 66.3, ὁρῶ V. 80.

ὄγδοον καὶ δέκατον —contrast VIII. 6 ἑνὸς δέον εἰκοστόν. The periphrastie forms are preferred in prose, esp. for 19, 29, etc.

ἐτελεύτα τῷδε —the epanaphora of the verb in this formula is prob. accidental. The formal close is in aeeordance with the Gk. habit of ending quietly.

ἐπιγιγνομένου —used of natural phenomena, whether ordinary or unexpected.

ἡγεῖτο —ἡγεμὼν is the regular word for a Spartan king or regent in the field, and for the supreme commander of any foreign expedition.

Ἀρχιδάμου —had died in 427 B.C

πρῶτον μὲν . . . ἔπειτα —Thue. has πρῶτον (πρῶτα ) μὲν . . ἔπειτα twenty-eight times, while he adds δὲ only eight times. If καὶ follows ἔπειτα, δὲ is regulaily added, even if πρῶτον is without μέν.

τὰ περὶ τὸ πεδίον —the country about the (Attic) plain

κατὰ πόλεις διελόμενοι —a common practice.

εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατόν —if the text is right, Thuc. reckons in the case of Boeotia from Oropus, which belonged to Athens and from which ran the road to Decelea and Athens, through the demes of Aphidna and Cephisia. Otherwise the distance would be much less. But from ἀπέχει to Βοιωτίας may be spurious, like some others of the geographieal data in Thuc.

[καὶ οὐ π. πλέον] —or not much more; but καὶ added in B is prob. only a correction. When an adscript is brought into the text, it is frequently joined on with καί.

ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ —for the control of, iu speaking of forts, etc., which by their position threaten a locality; e.g V. 7 ἐθεᾶτο τὴν θέσιν τῆς πόλεως ἐτὶ Θράκῃ ὡς ἔχοι. Cf the Château Gaillard.

τοῖς κρατίστοις —the richest parts, the soil of Attica as a whole not being rich. The land about Cephisia is noted for its vegetation.

ἐς τὸ κακουργεῖν —with ᾠκοδομεῖτο, expressing purpose. Cf. Dem. 31.13 παρεσκεύασεν εἰς τὸ λέγειν τι δοκεῖν.

ταῖς ὁλκάσι —without ἐν, as c. 7.3 .

ἐπιλεξάμενοι —i.e. placing them among the hoplites. They were first so used by Brasidas in Thrace. Before this they had only attended their masters in the field. One as θεράπων was his master's armour-bearer. The rest were used either as light-armed troops, or as sappers, engmeers, or carriers. The king often ordered them to carry booty.

νεοδαμώδων —helots emancipated as a reward for military services since 424 B.C.

ἄρχοντα —not ἡγεμών, as it was not a general expedition under the king. Contrast § 1. So Brasidas is always called ἄρχων or στρατηγός.

Βοιωτοὶ —loosely reekoned among οἱ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ, as though he had said only οἱ δὲ Πελοποννήσιοι, which generally in Thuc. includes all the allies of Sparta. When in II. 9 he says Πελοποννήσιοι πάντες πλὴν Ἀργείων καὶ Ἀχαιῶν. he uses Π. in the strict geographieal sense, in contrast with the Greeks ἔξω Πελοποννήσου.

ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι —the same idiom c. 24.3; 27.3 ; 71.3. It is constantly corrupted in the MSS. of Thuc., as the scribes did not understand it.

ὁρμήσαντες —generally ὁρμῶμαι is used in this sense.

ἐς τὸ πέλαγος ἀφεῖσαν —a frequent idiom; e.g. Herod. VII. 193; Aristoph Eq 432 ἀφήσω κατὰ κύμ’ ἐμαυτὸν οὔριον. θάλασσα cannot be used in this phrase; only Plutarch and Pausanias do so.

μετὰ δὲ τούτους Κορίνθιοι —this still refers to οἱ δ’ ἐν τῇ Πελοποννήσῳ above, which is in fact divided into Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν . . . Βοιωτοὶ δὲ . . . Κορίνθιοι . . . Σικυώνιοι, but the sense requires that the imperf. ἀπέστελλον should be given up for the aor. ἀφεῖσαν, ἀπέπεμψαν, ἀπέστειλαν. (The form of this passage, like many others, shows how Thuc. is in a transition stage between the εἰρομένη λέξις—running style of Herod.—and the artificial periods of Isocrates.)

ἄρχοντα —governed by both partic, and verb.

Σικυώνιοι —now dissatisfied with Sparta because early in 417 an aristocratic government had been foreed upon it. This aristocracy, however, subsequently got the upper hand, and Sicyon aided Sparta after the battle of Leuctra, 371. But in 369, the democrats revived and Sicyon joined Thebes. In 367 or 6, after violent dissensions and the tyranny of Euthyphron, it passed again into the hands of Sparta.

l. 39

ἕωσπερ —rare, except in Plato. It occurs in Xen. Hel. VI. 5.12, VII. 2.23 (Dindorf); Xen. Cyr. VII. 5.39; Dem. 54.3; Plat. Lach. 188B; Apol. 29D; Prot. 325A; Rep. 342B, 433 B; Phaedr. 243E; Theaet. 177D, 200 C; Meno 97C; Parm. 144C; Sophist. 235C.

αὐτοῖς —they found that—dat. of interest.

τὸν νοῦν ἔχωσιν —distinguish from νοῦν ἔχειν = to be sensible.

περί τε —answered by καὶ τὸν Δημοσθένη.

ᾧ εἴρητο . . . ἀφικομένῳ . . . παρακαλεῖν —same construction c. 20.1. The other constr.—the partic. in the aecus.—is found also in c. 20. Cf. VIII. 39 εἴρητο αὐτοῖς ἐς Μίλητον ἀφικομένους ξυνεπιμελεῖσθαι.

τὸ ξυμμαχικὸν —Argos was neutral throughout the Archidamian War, having a treaty with Sparta. It finally joined Athens in 417.

παρακαλεῖν . . . ἐπὶ —a military phrase; cf. παραβοηθεῖν ἐπὶ c. 37.3; 53.1: 71, 6.

ἀπέστελλον —imperf. representing the details of an elaborate business, as constantly with ‘sending’ verbs; cf. on c. 3.1.

Χίαις —the only island in the Aegean besides Lesbos then retaining the position of an independent ally of Athens. Hence it supplied a contingent of ships and paid no tribute.

Ἀθηναίων —after δ καὶ χ., partitive. See on c. 16.1.

νησιωτῶν —i.e. the other Aegean islands; it was their duty to supply πεζὸν καὶ χρήματα.

χρήσασθαι —ingressive, ‘obtain for service’—a sense almost confined to first aor. forms.

ἄλλων —viz. those of Ionia, Hellespont, and Thraciau Chalcidice. They also were liable to supply infantry, if required. (This incident illustrates the encroachments of Athens on the rights of her allies. They were not originally liable to personal service after they commuted their contmgents for a money payment; much less were they bound to supply anything Athens might require.)

εἶχον —subject, the Athenians.

ξυμπορίσαντες —joined by καὶ to the datives above, as all express attendant circumstances of some kind.

Χαρικλέους —he had been one of the commission, ζητηταί, appointed to inquire into the mysterious mutilation of the Hermae in 415. (Like Pisander, he started as a democrat, but went over to the oligarelis in 412, beeoming one of the Four Hundred. He fied to Decelea when the Fom Hundred were deposed, and assisted in the ruin of Athens. He returned along with Critias and other exiles under the terms of peaee imposed by Sparta. He was active in promoting the establishment of the Thirty, of whom he became one. When Theramenes opposed the violent measures of Critias, and the party split into two factions, Charicles followed Critias and shared with him the authorship of the worst deeds of the Thirty. His demeanour was servile to Lysander, but overbearing towards his countrymen.)

καὶ τὸν κ τ.λ. —the clause is object of περιέμενε. Cf. III. 2.2.

ἧκεν —returned from his expedition into the interior.

ἑκασταχόθεν —in the rel. clause, as c. 20.2.

l 7.

ἀπόπειραν λαμβάνειν —cf. Herod. VIII. 9 ἀπόπειραν ποιήσασθαι .

ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ —i.e. ἀπὸ τοῦ ναυμαχίας ἀπόπειραν λ.: there is the same use of id, hoc, quod, quae, in Lat, as Cic. de Leg. II. 33 exemplorum nostra est plena respublica ex augurum praedictis mulla vera cecidisse. Neque enim . . id (i.e. augurandi consuetudinem) ad hoc tempus retinuissent.

ἄξιον τοῦ κινδύνου —worth the risk, something which would be cheap at the price, a good return.

ξυνανέπειθε δὲ —very difficult: ‘Moreover H. earnestly supported his advice (καὶ only emphasises ξυν‐), so that they might not lack spirit to attack by sea, saying as a retort to the A. that even they had no hereditary right to naval skill, nor yet would it last for ever.’ The imperf and the ‐αν‐ both denote the difficulty of persuading them. They had before thought of peace.

Ἑρμοκράτης —the Themistocles of Syracuse.

τοῦ . . . μὴ ἀθυμεῖν —expresses purpose, a construction rare outside Thuc. (So Goodwin; but edd. rightly deny that the words can go directly with ξυνανέπειθε. The remedy is surely to comma them off, not to alter τοῦ .)

ταῖς ναυσὶ — not ‘attack the A. fleet,’ but ‘attack with their own fleet’; cf. c. 7.4.

ἐπιχειρῆσαι —the MSS. have the fut., but the abbreviations for the aor. and fut. were indistinguishable. (If it is bracketed, ταῖς ναυσι must go with άθυμεῖν.)

πρὸς τοὺς Ἀ. —it is always assumed that this goes with ἐπιχειρῆσαι, but there are no instances of ἐπιχειρεῖν προς (L. and S. cite this wrongly as 7, 51): hence we take it with λέγων, as in σκοπεῖν, βουλεύεσθαι πρός. Cf. Andoc. 1, 48 λέγει πρός με, he says, meaning me . . ; Aeschin. 2.42 μνημονικῶς εἰπεῖν πρὸς τὰ . . . in answer to . . . ; Dem. 24.190 πρὸς τοὺς τοιούτους λόγους προακηκοέναι μικρά. (It is well known how fond Thuc. is of making the leaders of opposing forees answer one another. Here we may imagine Nicias reminding the A. of their naval record, and Hermocrates making this retort.) For πρός cf. Steup on 3.48.2

ἀίδιον —Classen understands this of the future, probably rightly. Cf. II. 41.5 πανταχοῦ μνημεῖα ἀίδια ξυγκατοικίσαντες, that will ‘last for ever.’

ἀλλ’ —bracketed nedlessly by Stahl and Classen. Do not supply ἔχειν, as edd. say, or you will get no antithesis to πάτριον and ἀίδιον.

ἠπειρώτας —i.e. not a naval power. The word is often used of Syr. and indeed of Sicily generally.

ὑπὸ Μήδων —because Themistocles persuaded them to build a fleet at the time of the Persian wars.

γενέσθαι —does not go after ἀναγκασθέντας, as it is commonly taken, but is parallel with ἔχειν. Thus ναυτικοὺς γ. gives the antithesis we wanted.

πρὸς ἄνδρας κ τ.λ. —it is a faet well known in business that ‘bounce’ is best auswered with ‘bounee.’ ‘In dealing with daring men . . . those who in turn show daring appear most formidable.’

οἵους —attracted, as often with short clauses So in Oratio Obliqua short rel. clauses are sometimes attracted into the infin. χαλεπὸς=‘dangerous,’ as in III. 42.3.

[αὐτοῖς] —prob. spurious, since πρὸς ἄνδρας τ. seems to be put first so as to refer to all that follows.

ᾧ —resumed by τὸ αὐτὸ.

ἐκεῖνοι —i.e. ἄνδρες τολμηροί.

οὐ δυνάμει ἔστιν ὅτε —for the omission of μὲν cf. c. 1.2 ,

προύχοντες —this is the Attic word. Thuc. also uses προφέρειν which is Ionic in this sense c. 64.2; 77.2 .

τῷ —their.

σφᾶς —when a plur subj. of infin. includes the subj. of the main verb as here, whether in whole or in part, it is put either in nom. or accus. at will. Cf. c. 48.1 ὁ Ν. ἐνόμιζε . . . λαθεῖν ἂν . . . ποιοῦντες. Andoc. 1, 82 has ἐψηφίσασθε . . . δοκιμάσαντας ἁναγράψαι, part of the voters being subj. of the infin.

ὑποσχεῖν —we expect rather παρασχεῖν: a rare sense of ὑπ‐. See L. and S.; Hesych. ὔπεχε· πάρεχε.

καὶ Συρακοσίους —and so he knew that by their unexpected boldness in resisting the A. fleet, the S. would gain much more through the amazement with which their conduct would strike the enemy, than they would lose by their inferiority to the A. in naval skill.

πλέον τι —in II. 11 both πλέον τι and ἀμελέστερόν τι are found; the τι indefinitely inereasing the range of the adv. μᾶλλόν τι is common.

τὸ τοιοῦτον —such conduct as has been described; a regular use of τοιοῦτος, very eommon in Aristotle, and a cause of obscurity in his style.

ἐπιστήμῃ . . . ἀπειρίαν —stock antithesis in Thuc.

εἴ του ἄλλου —attraction, as Soph. OC 734 πρὸς πόλιν δ’ ἐπίσταμαι | σθένουσαν ἥκων, εἴ τιν’ Ἑλλάδος, μέγα .

ὁ δὲ Γ. —put first for emphasis though the subj. changes below at αἱ τριήρεις. This is fairly common in Gk. and Lat.: cf. Cic. Att. 3.9 Quintus frater quum ex Asia decessisset, valde fuit ei properandum.

αὐτὸς μὲν —while he, paratactic.

αἱ δὲ τριήρεις —the subj. is presently subdivided into thirty-five and forty-five.

αἱ δὲ πέντε —the other forty-five of them, the art. being often thus added with the items of a sum total.

τὸ νεώριον —the docks in the Great Harbour were probably built by Gelon (485-476). ‘It is less clear whether he had any hand in the other haven of the warships, in the Little Harbour. . . . It was only by Dionysius that it was brought to perfection,’ after 405. Freeman.

περιέπλεον — i.e round the south point of Ortygia.

βουλόμενοι —after τριήρεις, applying to the men in the ships as usual.

ἐντὸς —sc. τοῦ μεγάλου λιμένος.

ἀμφοτέρωθεν —better, as Classen, = ‘by sea and land’; but Freeman says: ‘the plan was that the one division should sail across the Great Harbour, while the other sailed round the Island, so as to attack the A. fleet unexpectedly on both sides at once.’

ἀντιπληρώσαντες —antithesis to ἐπλήρουν c. 21, end. Abresch compares βάλλειν and ἀντι‐ c. 25 , πολιορκεῖν and ἀντι‐ c. 28 , παρατάσσειν and ἀντι‐ c. 5.

ταῖς μὲν —again the art. in giving the parts of a whole.

ἐπικαταβάντων —gone down to the shore to watch the battle.

προσπεσὼν —before the garrisons left in them and the men on the shore could arm.

πρῶτον —adjective (for nothing further happens to τὸ μέγιστον)

τοῦ πρώτου ἁλόντος —that which was first taken, πρώτου being predicate in spite of its order. Cf. c. 13.2.

στρατόπεδον — here means the space between the A. walls on the other side of the harbour. Freeman .

ἐξεκομίζοντο —were getting away.

ἡλίσκετο . . ἐτύγχανον —the two imperfects mark the events as simultaneous. This would not be so with ἐπειδὴ if aor. were used. See note on c. 3.3

οἱ ἐξ αὐτῶν φεύγοντες —cf Andoc. οἱ ὲκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφευγον. Attraction of the preposition is very rare in Latin; e.g. Cic. ad Fam. VII. 1 ex illo cubiculo, ex quo . . . tempoia consumpseris, for in illo . . .

παρέπλευσαν —sailed past, and so across the harbour.

ναυμαχοῦσαι —this order of the attributive partic. is only possible when the noun has other attributes besides the partic.; here πρὸ τοῦ ς.

περὶ ἀλλήλας —prepositions with ἑαυτοὺς, σφᾶς αὐτοὺς, ἀλλήλους are used to express reciprocity unless there is a compound of διὰ available.

παρἐδοσαν —gave away.

καὶ ὑφ’ ὧν —for καὶ ἐκείνας ὑφ’ ὧν The antecedent can always be omitted, but the rel., unless it be either in the nom. or else governed by a prep., is regulaily attracted. Thus in II. 61 for ἐγκαρτερεῖν ἃ ἔγνωτε we should prob. read ἐ. οἷς ἔγνωτε.

πλὴν ὅσον —sc. τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἦν, a part of εἰμι being constantly omitted after ὅσος .

νησιδίῳ — the ceremony was gone through on one of the small islets off Plemmyriôn; but it was the last act of the invaders on that side of the Syr. harbour. Freeman .

στρατόπεδον —as l. 14 above.

ούτως ἐπεπράγεσαν —used of a bad result, as in II. 4.

τροπαῖα ἔστησαν αὐτῶν —the regular construction.

ἐπισκευάσαντες —see on c. 1.1

ἐν τῶν τειχῶν τῇ ἁλώσει — Classen notes that Herod. and Thuc are fond of inserting the gen. between a prep. and its case.

χρήματα — bona, non pecuniae. Haacke.

πολλὰ μὲν . . . πολλὰ δὲ —Thuc. does not use this anaphora so elaborately as most writers. The instances in him are simple, like εἰ μὲν . . . εἰ δέ, ἅμα μὲν . . . ἅμα δέ. For πολλαὶ μὲν . . . πολλαὶ δέ cf. VI. 20.4. Eur. Rh. 311 has a fourfold anaphora with πολύς.

ἐμπόρων —some from Greece, some from Sicily.

ἐγκατελήφθη —similar compounds in Thuc. are ἐγκαταλείπω, ἐγκαθέζομαι, ἐγκαθίστημι, ἐγκαθορμίζομαι, ἐγκατοικοδομεῖν, ἐγκατασκήπτειν.

οἱ ἔσπλοι —because the S. now commanded the mouth of the harbour.

διὰ μάχης . . . ἐγίγνοντο —cf. διὰ μάχης ἰέναι II. 11; Eur. Hel. 978. See also on c. 8.3. (See Wecklein on Aesch. PB 121.)

ἔς τε —the τε is not correlative with either of the preceding negs., but simply joins the sentences, this being a use of τε that gradually fell out of Attic prose.

οἵπερ . . . φράσουσιν —purpose.

ἐν ἐλπίσιν εἰσὶ —ct. below § 6, and ἐν ἐλπίδι c. 46 The opposite is ἐν ἀθυμίᾳ or ἀπορίᾳ εἶναι

l 10.

τῶν τε π. ἐπιτυχοῦσαι —Thuc. uses the dat. also with ἐπιτυγχάνω.

Καυλωνιάτιδι —neighbourhood of Caulonia in Bruttium. The whole of this region was πολύδενδρος, and contained ξύλα ἄφθονα, VI. 90. Pythagoras lived there when driven from Croton.

φυλάξαντες —for this sense, cf. c. 83 τῆς νυκτὸς φ. τὸ ἡσυχάζον.

Μεγάροις —Hyblaean M.: it was the fourth site on which settled the emigrants from Megara in Greece.

ἀποφεύγουσιν —sudden change of subj.; cf. on c. 4.4.

νεωσοίκων —prob. built by Gelon, the second founder of Syracuse. See on c. 22.1, l. 11. The piles had been driven in during the winter of 415

μυριοφόρον —of 10,000 talents' burden, assuming with Arnold that a talent was the ordinary unit of weight: but the matter is not certain. Lobeck conj. μυριαμφόρον, but the form is well attested.

ὤνευον —drew up with windlasses (ὄνοι).

ὁλκάδος —i.e. the ναῦς μυριοφόρος. Notice again the attraction of ἐκ.

τῆς σταυρώσεως ή κρύφιος —the hidden part of the stockade, the adj. assimilated, as with πολύς, ἡμισύς, sometimes ὅσος.

ἦσαν . . . οὓς —see on c. 11.2,

δεινὸν —dangerous.

μὴ . . . περιβάλῃ —epexegetic of προσπλεῦσαι, and so depending on δεινὸν ἦν.

περὶ ἕρμα —cf. the fine lines of the Furies in Aesch. Eum. 554 δῑ αἰῶνος δὲ τὸν πρὶν ὄλβον ἕρματι προσβαλὼν δίκας ὤλετ’ ἄκλαυστος. Anacreon ἀσήμων ὑπὲρ ἑρμάτων φορεῦμαι.

πολλὰ δὲ καὶ ἄλλα —M. W. Humphreys examines this phrase in Class. Rev. v. 431, and concludes that καὶ is not needed in connecting ἄλλος with πολύς, and that when it is inserted, it means also. He shows that ἄλλοι πολλοὶ is very common and πολλοὶ ἄλλοι not rare.

οἷον εἰκὸς —note the phrase and cf. εἰκότως.

πείραις —stratagems. Bloomfield notes that πεῖρα implies trickery. Cf. Soph. Aj. 2 πεῖράν τιν’ ἐχθρῶν ἁρπάσαι .

πόλεις —of their allies in Sicily

πρέσβεις . . . Κορινθίων —not Syracusans, in order that greater credence might be given to the message (Haacke).

ἀγγέλλοντας —see on c. 3.1. 52

τῆς ναυμαχίας πέρι —they would of course not send an embassy round to report the defeat (this would be τὴν ναυμαχίαν), but, as the news was sure to spread, to give explanations.

δηλώσοντας —the constr. changes from pres. to fut., as in II. 44 οὐκ ὀλοφύρομαι μᾶλλον ἢ παραμυθήσομαι; cf. Tac. An. I. 18 interficietis quam desciscitis.

ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς —against the A.

διαπεπολεμησόμενον —the accus. abs joined to gen. as in c. 15.1, and Plato, Rep. p. 604 B ὡς οὔτε δήλου ὄντος . . οὔτε ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν οὐδὲν προβαῖνον. Cf. Livy 23.13 debellatum fore (fut. perf. infin. pass.), si adniti voluissent.

ἔπρασσον —of negociation or diplomacy, as often.

ξυνελέγη αὐτῷ —continues from c. 20.3. It is likely that the dat. in this construction is by origin a dat. of possession, like ἐστί μοι, just as much as the dat. of the ‘agent’ with perf. passives; since we find occasionally such a phrase as τὰ πραχθέντ’ αὐτῷ for ‘his acts’ instead of τὰ πεπραγμέν’ αὐτῷ. So we can trans. ‘when his forces had mustered.’

Χαρικλεῖ —see c. 20 .

Ἐπιδαύρου —cf. c. 18.3. This descent on E repeated and emphasized the A. action of the preceding year.

τὰ καταντικρὺ —at a point on the Laconian coast opposite K., at a spot marked by the temple of Apollôn, as Freeman says Grote (see margin) wrongly says ‘on the island.’

l 18.

ξυγκατέλαβε —with Charicles.

μαχαιροφόρων —the wearing of dirks is a well-known custom of some of the Thracian tribes.

τοῦ Διακοῦ —the Dii were independent and lived mostly in the region of the Rhodope or Despoto mountains.

οὓς ἔδει —should have, according to arrangement. M.T. 415.

ὕστερον — ‘too late,’ as in ὕστερον παρεγενοντο, ἦλθον.

ὅθεν —antecedent omitted, as in Dem. 45.81 ανάγειν ὅθεν εἴληφας. Andoc. 1, 64 ἔλαβον ὅθεν ὁρμώμενοι ταῦτ’ ἐποίουν.

ἔχειν —keep.

τὸν ἐκ τῆς Δ. πόλεμον —the incursions from D.; not the same as ὁ Δεκελεικὸς πόλεμος, as ancient authors call the war from 413.

δραχμὴν —double the ordinary pay of a hoplite.

ἐπειδὴ γὰρ —from the time that D. was occupied for the injury of the country, at first by the whole army, after being fortified by it during this summer, and afterwards by garrisons reheving one another at fixed intervals. (This trans. takes ὑπὸ πάσης τῆς ς. both with τειχισθεῖσα and with ἐπῳκεῖτο, not, as is usually done, with τειχισθεῖσα only)

φρουραῖς —replacing the gen. with ὑπό.

ἔβλαπτε —the subj. to be supplied is ἡ Δ. τειχισθεῖσα.

ὀλέθρῳ —a strong word, ‘devastation,’ like the vastitas Italiae which Hannibal saw in a vision. ὄλεθρος is not generally used with things; it is as though a pest were destroying their resources

βραχεῖαι —the average duration of the previous invasions had only been about a month, i.e. as long as provisions held out.

ὁτὲ μὲν . . . ὁτὲ δὲ —does not occur elsewhere in good Attic prose. Xen. Hier. 1, 5 has ἔστι μὲν ὄτε . . . ἔστι δ’ ὅτε, and the edd. compare Plato, Phacdo, p 59 A ὁτὲ μὲν . . . ἑνίοτε δὲ and Theaet. p. 207 D ὁτὲ μὲν . . . τοτὲ δέ.

πλειόνων ἐπιόντων —VIZ. arriving from the Peloponnese to overrun Attica. The Spartans expected the occupation of Decelea would at once cripple the A. in Sicily. It did not do so: therefore special efforts were from time to time made by sending extra troops. The A. had done much the same at the beginning of the war in the case of Potidaea.

ἐξ ἀνάγκης —of necessity, to provision the garrison.

τῆς ἴσης φρουρᾶς —the normal garrison; in ἴσης he is thinking of the successive garrisons.

οὐκ ἐκ παρέργου —non obiter. His father Archidamus had been accused of slackness in his conduct of the war.

τῆς . . . χώρας . . . ἐστέρηντο — στερεῖν is to withhold something forcibly or fraudulently from its owner; as Demosth. speaks of himself as ἐστερημένος τῶν πατρῴων by his guaidians.

ἐν γῇ ἀποκρότῳ —with ἀπεχωλοῦντο; the two causes being expressed in different constructions, as often. Xen. in his treatise on riding refers to the roughness of the ground in parts of Attica, and gives advice to riders.

ξυνεχῶς ταλαιπωροῦντες —by continual fatigue.

Ὠρωποῦ —at this time O. belonged to Athens. It fell into the hands of Boeotia in 412.

πολυτελὴς —the question of finance was now becoming serious. Want of money finally ruined A in the war.

τῶν τε πάντων —so all that the city needed had to be imported, and thus it ceased to be a city and became a fortress.

τῇ ἐπἀλξει —collective, as in II. 13. So Livy 23.16.8 uses vallum ferre for vallos f.

ἐφ’ ὅπλοις που —at camping-stations here and there. ὅπλα are military posts within the city, as distinct from τὸ τεῖχος, which stands for the fortifications generally, being used collectively. (One must agree with Muller-Strnbing that που is whimsical and poor. If it is genuine, Thuc. is at fault.)

l. 16

τό γ’ ἄν —the following clauses, (1) ἀποστῆναι, (2) ἀντιπολιορκεῖν, (3) ποιῆσαι, are in explanatory apposition to the preceding ἥν, which= φιλονικίαν. The ἂν belongs to all three clauses. Hence what would have seemed incredible is this: εἰ αὐτοὶ πολιορκοῖντο . . , οὑδ’ ἂν ὣς ἀποσταῖεν ἐκ Σ, ἀλλὰ . . ἀντιπολιορκοῖεν ἄν, καὶ τοσοῦτον ἂν τὸν παράλογον ποιήσειαν κ τ λ. Hence, trans. literally, ‘And yet (though they had two wars) their pertinacity was such that no man before it was experienced would have believed the account of it, that, even if they were themselves besieged by the P. by means of a permanent occupation, they would not even so withdraw from S., but would in turn lay siege in the same manner to Syr. (a city which taken alone is as large as A) and would astonish the Greeks with such a display of strength and audacity that, whereas at the beginning of the war the Greeks generally supposed that they would hold out perhaps for a year, perhaps for two years, possibly for three, but certainly not longer than three, if the P. should invade Attica, they on the contrary in the seventeenth year after the first invasion should actually go to S. . . . and voluntarily take on themselves another war.’

μηδ’ ὣς —ὣς (=οὕτως) only appears in prose in καὶ ὥς, οὐδ’ ὥς, μηδ’ ὥς; occasionally before οὖν, as III. 37.5. 20

αὐτήυ γε καθ’ αὑτὴυ —i e. without reckoning Sparta at all; that is to say, Syr. would have been a big city for A. to besiege even if she were not herself in difficulties at the time. (Others think this means (a) without counting the Athenian empire, (b) without reckoning allies on either side.)

τοσοῦτον —answered by ὅσον.

ὅσον —when two things, persons, or sets of persons are compared by means of τοσοῦτον . . . ὅσον, there are often two clauses following the ὅσον: these two clauses are then themselves contrasted by μὲν and δὲ—here οἱ μὲν . . . οἱ δὲ ἔτει—and they describe the extent of the difference between the two things compared in the τοσοῦτον clause. (See Appendix II.) Here ‘the A. astonished the Greek world so much that the Greek world thought they would hold out a year or two, whereas the A. after all these years undertook the Sicilian expedition’

<οἱ μὲν> οἱ μὲν οἱ δὲ οἱ δὲ γε οἱ δὲ —when these particles are thus repeated, it is usual to find the extremes contrasted, as here <οἱ μὲν> and the last οἱ δέ, i.e. the Greeks at large and Athens. The first <οἱ μὲν> is subdivided in the clauses that follow it.

οἱ δὲ τριῶν γε ἐτῶν —δέ γε or δὲ . . . γε caps a previous statement. οὺδεὶς is in limiting apposition to οἱ δὲ, and τριῶν ἐτῶν is gen. of comparison.

τὴν πρώτην ἐσβολὴν —in June 431.

ἦλθον —Thuc. here proceeds as if he had said τοσοῦτον τὸν παράλογον έποἱησαν instead of τος οῦτον τὀν π. ποιῆσαι ἂν— shifting the point of view which was that of a person hearing of such vigour before he actually witnessed it.

τῷ πολέμῳ . . . τετρυχωμένοι —at the time of the expedition A. had been recovering for seven years; but Thuc. here thinks of the state of A. in 415 as contrasted with her state in 431.

δῑ ἃ —the plur. beeause he sums up all the causes that led to their impoverisation, namely the losses of individuals and the losses of the treasury resulting from the φιλονικία above described.

καὶ τότε —other causes of impoverisation are now added, namely those resulting from the fortification of Decelea. ‘For these reasons and because of the serious damage which was being then caused by D. and the other expenses that fell heavily on them.’

ὑπὸ τῆς Δ. . . . βλαπτούσης —this construction, in which the partic. has the force of a verbal subst., is less common in Gk. than in Latin (ante urbem conditam). It seems that it is not used unless the noun and prep. would make sense without the partic; the only exception being ἅμα with expressions of time. Cf. c. 42.2 διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην ; II. 49 μετὰ ταῦτα λωφήσαντα. It is oftenest found with ἅμα, μετὰ with accus., and ἐπὶ with gen., as Herod. I. 15 ἐπὶ τούτου τυραννεύοντος. (See Gildersleeve in A. J. P. July '92)

τῶν . . προσπιπτόντων — gen. abs., the two causes being again differently expressed.

ἀδύνατοι . . . τοῖς χρήμασι —on the analogy of δύνατος and δύναμαι with dat.

τὴν εἰκοστὴν —a tax of five per cent on all imports and exports within the A. empire. Probably this system lasted, with the exception of Chalcedon (? others), to the end of the war. είκοστολόγοι were appointed to collect it in the different poits, and, according to Aristophanes, they sometimes carried on smuggling on their own account; and Aegina seems to have become a sort of depot for contraband goods smuggled out of Attic territory to the Peloponnese. Aegina was a free port. (Cf. Gilbert, Beitrage zur innern Geschichte Athens, p. 286.) The establishment of the εἰκοστὴ is the beginning of important financial reforms.

καὶ πρίν —as before.

πολλῷ μείζους . . . ὅσῳ καὶ μείζων —a double compar or superl. is the way to express proportion. Cf. I. 68 προσήκει ἡμᾶς οῦχ ἥκιστα εὶπεῖν, ὅσῳ καὶ μέγιστα έγκλήματα ἔχομεν; c. 41.3 .

τῷ Δ. ὑστερήσαντας —who came too late for D. to use them.

Διειτρέφει —Pausanias I. 23 describes a statue at Athens of D. pierced with arrows, presumably in the act of regaining his ship (see c. 30.1) after the barbarous slaughter of the children of Mycalessus The inscribed base of this statue is extant.

εἰπόντες . . . βλάψαι — λέγω is constructed with accus. and infin. regularly (a) when it = κελεύω, as here: (b) when used in the sense of ferunt, fertur. It is then oftener in the pass., but the act. is found so. When Thuc. wants to imply that a statement is false, he says λέγεται ὡς. Instances of λέγω with accus. and infinit. in the sense of φημὶ are not common.

Χαλκίδος —after ravaging the country round Tanagia, they had crossed to Euboea.

ἀφ’ ἑσπέρας —cf. ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου c. 43.2.

Μυκαλησσόν —the destruction of this town, so ancient that its foundation was said to be contemporary with Cadmus, was in every way disgraceful and revolting. Pausanias says the place was in ruins in his day, and there are still considerable remains both of the acropolis and of the lower town.

Ἑρμαίῳ —shrine of H. on the road from the coast to Thebes.

ἀπροσδοκήτοις =οὐ προσδεχομένοις, active. Many adj. have both an act. and pass meaning, e.g. φοβερός, ἀδεής, προστρόπαιος, and so in Lat. formidolosus, etc. Sallust, Cat. 39, 2. Cf. on c. 42.3, line 24.

ἔστιν ᾗ . . . τοῦ δὲ —cf. c. 2.4.

βραχέος ᾠκοδομημένου —cf. II. 34.8 βῆμα ὑψηλὸν πεποιημένον .

l 26.

τοὺς ἀνθρώπους —Pausanias says that a man would have searched in vain in his day for descendants of the inhabitants of Mycalessus.

πάντας . . . ὅτῳ —like ἕκαστος, οὐδείς, πᾶς τις, τις referring to a plur.

ὁμοῖα —for ὁμοίως, as several times in Herod., but in no other Attic prose author. Thuc. also has ἴσα for ἴσως.

τοῖς μάλιστα —sc. φονικοῖς. This idiom is found also in Herod. and in late writers. Josephus speaks of a man called by the Jews Θρᾳκίδαν διὰ τὴν τῆς ὠμότητος ὑπερβολήν.

ἐν ᾧ ἂν —whenever, ἐν ᾧ describing all the attendant circumstances

θαρσήσῃ —ingressive

ἰδέα πᾶσα —Thuc is fond of this expression.

καὶ ἄρτι ἔτυχον —notice that the rel. is dropped in the second clause, as very often Generally, however, a demonstrative is added instead, as in II. 4 ὃ ἦν τοῦ τείχους καὶ αἱ θύραι ἔτυχον ἀνεῳγμέναι αὐτοῦ. Cf. Hooker in the Eccles. Pol. ‘Whom although to know be life, and joy to make mention of His name.’ Also ‘Whose fan is in His hand and He will throughly purge His floor’ Livy, 23, 8 Cum quo . . . steterat, nec eum . . . patria majestas sententia depulerat. 37-8.

ἔτυχον . . ἐσεληλυθότες —the perf. is necessary to make the partic. precede ἔτυχον (ἔλαθον ἔφθασα) in time; as in 2.4 ἔτυχον . . . ἀνεῳγμέναι .

κατέκοψαν πάντας —Freeman well says that this ‘deed of blood outdid all crimes of Greek against Greek, and sent a shudder through all Hellas.’ But, after all, Napoleon III. got the throne of France by acts as infamous.

ξυμφορὰ . . . αὕτη —this was a calamity to the whole city unparalleled in severity, and fell upon it with singular suddenness and horror. Each of the expressions appended to ξυμφορὰ adds a new point: (a) it was universal—πάσῃ, (b) it was greater than others—οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων, (c) it was quite sudden and very horrible.

οὐδεμιᾶς ἥσσων —i.e. ‘greater than any,’ as in Aesch. PB 1013 (αὐθαδία) αὐτὴ καθ’ αὑτὴν οὐδενὸς μεῖζον σθένει=‘less than anything.’ Dem. 1.27 ἡ τῶν πραγμάτων αἰσχύνη οὐδεμιᾶς ἐλάττων ζημίας τοῖς γε σώφροσι. Cf. cc. 71 and 85. Note that ἥσσων ἢ μηδὲν would mean less than (the abstract idea of) nothing.

μᾶλλον ἑτέρας —a common idiom in place of a superlative.

προκεχωρηκότας —on the return march to the coast.

ἀφείλοντο . . . καταδιώκουσιν —see on c. 3.4 .

ἐν τῇ ἐσβἀσει τοὺς πλείστους —it appears below that, out of 1300, the number of those killed was 250. Hence the sense ‘most of those who were killed fell whilst embarking.’

ἔξω τοξεύματος —out of range, Xen. Cyr. I. 4.23, like ἔξω βελῶν. Eur. Orest. 1531 εἴσω ξίφους. Livy, 22, 15, 8 priusquam ad conjectum teli veniret.

ἐπεὶ ἔν γε τῇ ἄλλῃ —whereas elsewhere in the retreat they ran forward from the line and closed in together and protected themselves with skill after the fashion of their country against the Th. cavalry . . ., and so only a few of them fell during this.

ἐν τούτῳ —neut., like ἐν ῳ c. 29.4 .

τῶν Θρᾳκῶν —depends on πεντήκοντα καὶ δ.

ἀπὸ —cf. c. 87.6 ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν. 22

βοιωταρχῶν —Thebes elected two of the eleven chiefs of the Boeotian confederacy.

ὡς ἐπὶ μεγέθει —pro civitatis magnitudine, Portus: but it is uncertain whether τῆς πόλεως or τοῦ πάθους should be supplied. See Classen on c. 113.4.

ὀλοφύρασθαι ἀξίῳ —in Lat. with dignus, aptus, the infin. is used only in poetry and Silver prose. Also the pass. infin. is used, while in Gk. the act or mid. is regular.

τότε —refers to c. 26.3.

ἐκ τῆς Λακωνικῆς —the prep. is attracted to ἀποπλέων.

Φειᾷ —now Katakolo, the landing-place for visitors to Olympia.

ἔπλεον —proceeded on the voyage.

Ζάκυνθον καὶ Κ — the policy and interests of Zacynthus coincided with those of Corcyra. In 430 Sparta made an effort to obtain Z., but failed. Cephallenia, after remaining for a time neutral, joined Athens in the autumn of 431. Pericles had seen that the possession of the islands which lay on the road to Sicily was of extreme importance, and already in 433 he began to form alliances with them This was not with a view to invading Sicily, but to prevent Sparta from obtaining help from Syracuse, her ally, and from controlling the route to Sicily.

τῶν Μεσσηνίων —sc. ὁπλίτας.

Ἀκαρνανίας —all Acarnania, except Oeniadae, had made an alliance with Athens in the autumn of 430, and Demosthenes himself had taken Oeniadae into the alliance in 424.

Ἀλύζειαν —near the coast of Acarnania. Here Timotheus, son of Conon, set up his trophy in 375 during his successful voyage to restore Athenian supremacy in the north-west.

Ἀνακτόριον —had been an ally of Sparta; but it was seized by the Athenians at Naupactus and the Acarnanians in 425. Hence αὐτοὶ=οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι.

περὶ ταῦτα —occupied in this. περὶ is much commoner in this sense than ἀμφί, which prep. occurs only twice in Thuc. and not at all in the Orators.

τότε —see c. 16.2. τότε is often used in referring back to what has been already mentioned. Cf. c. 31.1, 81, 2.

κατὰ πλοῦν —cf. καθ’ ὁδόν, κατὰ τὴν πορείαν, κατὰ τὴν στρατηγίαν.

Κόνων —the admiral and statesman who opposed Thrasybulus at the end of the war. After Aegospotami he lived in exile in Cyprus. In 394 he won the battle of Cnidus after which he rebuilt the walls of Athens. He was probably sent to Naupactus in 414.

κατοκνοῦσι —the MSS. καταλυουσι is not appropriate, because there could be no question of bringing the war to an end, since the fortification of Decelea. (Classen's explanation is that war was not yet declared between Αthens and the Peloponnesians. But, if not, between whom is ὁ πόλεμος? It certainly had not been declared between the Corinthian ships and the A. squadron.)

πέμπειν —the request points to the decline of Athenian naval supremacy.

ὡς . . . οὔσας —even the partic. of personal verbs sometimes stand with their nouns in the accus. abs. . . if they are preceded by ὡς or ὥσπερ . M.T. 853.

δυοῖν δεούσας εἴκοσι — the number of A. ships at Naupactus was generally twenty.

τῆς στρατιᾶς τὸν ξ —cf. c. 24.2 . περὶ governs τὸν ξ.

ἀποτραπόμενος —turning back from his homeward voyage. Fr. Muller renders ‘after his return from Sicily.’

ὥσπερ καὶ ᾑρέθη —not as στρατηγός, which office he had held since Hecatombaeon 414, while the election was probably early in 414, but as colleague, ξυνάρχων, of Demosth. in this expedition.

οἱ δὲ . . . πρέσβεις —the subj. is again placed first for emphasis, in spite of ὁ Νικίας below. Cf. 3.4.1. It is not common.

τότε —as in c. 31.3.

μετὰ τὴν τοῦ Π. ἅλωσιν —why would not μετὰ Πλημμύριον ἡ?ρημένον do? See on c. 28.4, l. 32

οἰχόμενοι —attributive, though not under the art.

τοὺς τὴν δ. ἔχοντας —who commanded the route.

Κεντόριπας —Centuripa, now Centorbi, a very ancient Sicel town S. W. of Etna, of which it commands a splendid view.

Ἀλικυαίους —the only Alicyae known in Sicily is in the N. W. and cannot be meant here.

διαφρἠσωσι —a rare word, but well attested by the explanations given of it by ancient grammarians.

πειράσειν —see on c. 12.2. In Attic πειρῶμαι=conari, and only Herod. and Thuc. among prose anthors use the act.= conari.

Ἀκραγαντῖνοι — the great Sicel leader Ducetrus had attacked Acragas, which sought aid from Syr. 451. But Ducetius defeated the two. Then he was defeated by Syr., and sent to live at Corinth. He was allowed to return in 446, to the disgust of Acragas, which now retained its jealousy of Syr.

ἀφυλάκτοις τε καὶ ἐξαίφνης — the circumstances are differently expressed, as in c. 18.1. Cf. Tacitns An. 1, 23 fletu et pectus atque os manibus verberans.

Καμαριναῖοι —C. had previously been neutral. Its relations with Syr. had not been satisfactory. Originally an outpost of Syr., it had revolted from its mother-city and had been destroyed circ. 550. Subsequently it became part of Gela. In 484 Gelon transferred its population to Syr.; and in 461 it was re-colonised by Gela.

Γελῷοι —they had previously promised to send στρατιὰν οὐ πολλήν c. 1.4. In 498 Hippocrates, tyrant of Gela, defeated the Syracusans; his successor Gelon transferred his seat to Syr.

σχεδόν τι —almost, since some towns still remained faithful to A.; see c. 57.11 .

l. 9

οὐδὲ μεθ’ ἑτέρων —regular phrase for ‘neutral.’

οἱ δ’ ἄλλοι —this resumes the subject πᾶσα ἡ Σικελία after the parenthesis. Cf. Andoc I. 78, in the psephism of Patroclides, ὅσα όνόματα τῶν τετρακοσίων τινὸς ἐγγέγραπται . . . πλὴν ὁπόσα ἐν στήλαις γέγραπται . . . τὰ δὲ ἄλλα πάντα έξαλεῖψαι.

ἐπέσχον τὸ . . . ἐπιχειρεῖν — ‘refrained from attacking’ (Some edd wrongly compare II. 81.4 οὔτ’ ἐπέσχον τὸ στρατόπεδον καταλαβεῖν, where if the text is sound the sense must be ‘did not intend to occupy the camp,’ not ‘did not refrain from occupying a camp.’)

τὸν Ἰόνιον —sc. κόλπον.

Χοιράδας —two islands off Tarentum.

Μεσσαπίου —one of the three divisions of Iapygia, Messapia, extended from Tarentum to Brundisium.

Ἄρτᾳ —he seems to have been a man of note in his day, for Athenaeus reters to him as μέγας καὶ λαμπρός.

δυνάστῃς —suggested a foreign, un-Greek form of government. Hence the bad sense of δυναστεία, which is used, for instance, of the Thirty.

Μεταπόντιον —there are ruins of a temple on the site. The Romans destroyed it for having sided with Hannibal. Pausanias saw a theatre and walls standing. Pythagoras died there.

ἀναλαβόντες ταῦτα —taking these with them; the neut. is used as in c. 14.2 .

Θουρίαν —on the site of Sybaris. In 193 B.C. it became a Latin Colony—called Copia—after the great extension of the ager Romanus in Bruttium. Thurii was colonised by Athens in 443. Herodotus was among the colonists.

εἴ τις ὑπελέλειπτο —best taken with ἁθροίσαντες.

ἐν τούτῳ τύχης —the expulsion of the anti-Athenian party would make an offensive and defensive alliance possible.

τῶν ὁλκάδων —depends on κομιδῆς.

ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίᾳ —Thuc. uses also ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν. Similarly ἐπὶ is used with either the gen. or dat. of place in the same phrases.

ἔτι —of additional ships.

ἐλάσσους . . . τῶν Ἀττικῶν νεῶν —this might have been ἐ. τῶν Ἀθηναίων, i.e. ἢ τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις. Cf. VIII 53 ναῦς οὐκ ἐλάσσους σφῶν ἔχουσι.

κατα Ἐρινεὸν —east of Rhium, which, with Antirrhium on the opposite coast, commanded the entrance to the Gulf. Had the Corinthians been superior in numbers, they would have lain off Rhium, S. W. of Naupactus, and have tried to shut in the A.

καὶ αὐτοῖς —the dative is put early to contrast it with οἱ δ’ Ἀθηναῖοι below.

αὐτόθεν — from Achaea, which had originally been neutral, but in 417 joined Sparta.

ἀνεχοὐσαις —see L and S., B.; cf. Herod. VII. 123 πάσης πῆς Παλλήνης ἀνέχει μάλιστα. The meaning is common in Pausanias.

Πολυάνθης —prob. the same as the P. to whom, according to Xenophon, Tithraustes sent a bribe in order to bring about a war against Sparta.

τριάκοντα . . . καὶ τρισίν — in c. 31.4 the number is given as eighteen. Demosth. had added ten; and the rest must have come with Diphilus.

ἁπλῶς —with κατέδυ, absolutely. (Holden takes this with οὐδεμία, but there is no reason for emphasising this.)

ἑπτὰ δέ τινες —the τινες shows he was not certain of the exact number.

ἐμβαλλόμεναι —technically the ἐμβολὴ was a charge broadside with the ἔμβολον; προσβολὴ a charge prow to prow.

ἐπωτίδας —τὰ ἑκατέρωθεν πρῴρας ἐξέχοντα ξύλα, Schol. The anchors hung from them.

ἀντίπαλα — internal accus., defining the verb. Hence=ἀντίπαλον ναυμαχίαν. The plur. presents the details.

ὡς —the only case in which Thuc. uses ὡς for ὥστε. The use is common in Aeschylus, Sophocles, Herod., Xen.

αὐτοὺς ἑκατέρους —the nom. would be more regular; but the subjects are not really identical, since the infin. clause is meant to be general. It appears from what follows that the A. did not finally consider themselves victors.

αὐτῶν =τῶν ναυαγίων. For the two gens. cf. I. 25 κατὰ τὴν Φαιάκων προενοίκησιν τῆς Κερκύρας. See Classen on III. 116.6.

οὐκέτι —note (1) the adv. qualifying the noun: it is common with the neg., and verbal nouns often take the construction of the verb, as II. 65 ὑπὸ τοῦ πρώτου ἀνδρὸς ἀρχή: (2) the use of οὐκέτι, denoting a change of purpose or a disappointment of expectation.

οἱ ἕτεροι —sc. ἐνόμισαν.

οἵ τε . . . οἵ τ’ —the double τε shows that the two clauses are exactly parallel. Thuc. is fond of this τε . . . τε joining two concurrent acts.

κρατεῖν εἰ μὴ κ.τ.λ. —this is not a mere subtlety. The naval superiority of the A., esp. at Naupactus, had been so repeatedly acknowledged that the Cor. rightly considered that not to be beaten constituted a victory.

ὅτι οὐ π. ἐνίκων —the indic. shows that Thuc. states this as a fact: νικῷεν would mean that the A. reflected οὐ νικῷμεν .

παρεσκευάσθησαν —had been induced. This is undoubtedly the meaning, and it is common in the Orators, though there it generally implies underhand dealing. E.g. Dem. 20.145 πεισθεὶς ὑπὸ σοῦ διεγράψατο ἢ καὶ ὅλως ὑπὸ σοῦ παρεσκευάσθη; and παρασκευὴ constantly has a bad sense.

τὸν πεζὸν —for τὸν π. στρατόν. The ellipse of a masc. non-personal noun is rare. This one is found only in Herod and Thuc.

τῷ Σ. ποταμῷ —it gave its name to the ancient Sybaris, on the site of which Thurii now stood. Cf. the Gelas and Gela. The art. is usual when ποταμος is inserted with names of rivers. It is, however, often omitted by Herod. and now and then by Thuc.

οὐκ ἂν . . . βουλομένοις εἶναι —the same idiom is found in Lat. with volenti esse. The only instance of any other verb than volo is in Tac. An. I. 59 ut quibusque bellum invitis aut cupientibus erat.

εἶναι —rare use of infin. after λέγω in O.O.: even here εἶπον implies a formal notice, as also in II. 13 λέγων τὴν ἰσχὺν αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τούτων εἶναι. But the infin. is occasionally used loosely with λέγω.

ἐπικαταβάντες . . . πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν —the object of partic. and verb is, as usual, accommodated to the partic.

Λοκρῶν —they had refused to receive the A. from the first.

Πέτραν =Leucopetra.

αὖθις —referring to the previous sea-fight.

ἄλλῃ —as well. cf. c. 4.3.

παρασκευῇ —force.

τοῦ πεζοῦ —what is called the gen. of material. Rutherford Syn. § 106.

πρὶν ἐλθεῖν —depends on φθάσαι. πρὶν regularly takes aor. infin. unless continuance or attempt is implied.

ξυνέλεγον —equivalent to pluperf. in a rel. clause. It is like the historic pres. for aor.

ὡς —in such a manner as would give them the advantage according to what they had learned from the former battle. 8-9.

τι πλέον . . . σχήσοντες —cf. πλέον τί ἐστι with dat., and πλέον τι ποιεῖν. Cf. on § 5,

ἐνεῖδον =to learn by experience in action.

ξυντεμόντες ἐς ἔλασσον —shortening.

ἀντήριδας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν —stays of timber which extended from the cat-heads through the sides of the ship, and projected nine feet both ways, inside and outside.

τοῖχος —wall of a building: τεῖχος wall of a town. For a similar distinction cf τέμαχος slice of fish: τόμος slice of meat.

πρῴραθεν —with ἐπισκευασάμενοι, strengthening them at the prow.

διὰ τὸ μὴ —because they rowed round and struck the enemy broadside, and did not meet him prow to prow.

οὐκ ἐν πολλῷ —for ἐν οὐ πολλῷ: cf. II. 102, and μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ II. 17.2 .

πρὸς ἑαυτῶν —so πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων c. 49.2. Not a common use.

πρὸς κοῖλα —sc. τὰ ἔμβολα.

σφῶν —with περίπλουν οὔτε δ. For the order cf. II. 5.5 σφῶν πειραθέντες καταλαβεῖν τὴν πόλιν. It is put in contrast with Ἀθηναίοις

περίπλουν —the manœuvre of rowing round and ‘boring’ the enemy's vessels into a small space, so as to throw them into confusion.

διέκπλουν —the manœuvre of ‘rowing through the intervals of the adversary's line, and thus getting in their rear, . . . and before the ship of the adversary could change its position, of striking it either in the stern, or in some weak part.’ Grote. It is first heard of in Herod. VI. 12.

ᾦπερ τῆς τέχνης —which were the very manœuvres on which they depended most.

αὐτοὶ γὰρ κ.τ.λ. —for they themselves as far as possible would not, on the one hand, give them a chance of breaking their line, while the want of pace, on the other hand, would prevent them from boring them in.

τὸ μὲν . . . τὸ δὲ —adverbial, as τὰ μὲν . . . τὰ δέ, τοῦτο μὲν . . . τοῦτο δέ.

οὐ δώσειν διέκπλουν —so II. 83.5 οὐ διδόντες διέκπλουν .

κωλύσειν ὥστε —in Thuc. verbs of advising, preventing, and agreeing—as πείθειν, εἴργειν, ξυμβαίνειν—most commonly take ὥστε among verbs that can take the simple infin.

τῇ τε πρότερον —they would purposely employ the system of charging prow to prow, which was before considered want of skill in their pilots. τὸ ἀντίπ ρῳρον ξυγκροῦσαι is put as the supposed definition of ἀμαθία τῶν κυβερνητῶν, and the form of the sentence is an example of the effect which Thuc. produces by emphasising single words—here ἀμαθίᾳ. Thuc. much prefers giving definitions to giving examples; whereas in later oratory examples, παραδείγματα, are commoner. For the example, cf. II. 42.2, δοκεῖ δέ μοι δηλοῦν ἀνδρος ᾶρετὴν (‘virtue in a man,’ as ἀμαθίᾳ κυβερνητοῦ here) . . . ἡ νῦν τῶνδε καταστροφή.

ἀντίπρῳρον —agreeing with the indef. subject of ξυγκροῦσαι.

ξυγκροῦσαι —probably trans., as elsewhere in classical Greek. It is easy to supply τὴν ναῦν.

πλεῖστον . . . σχήσειν —as there is no other case of the superl with ἔχειν, Kruger wishes to read πλέον for πλεῖστον, Stahl περισχήσειν for σχήσειν. But πλεῖστον σχήσειν does not mean they would be very superior to, but rather ‘they would find very great (advantage)’ The phrase may be compared with Aristoph. Acharn. 474 ἐν ᾧπέρ ἐστι πάντα μοι τὰ πράγματα. Thuc. rather affects ἔχω in place of ἐστι, as in II. 4 ἐμπείρους ἔχοντες τοὺς διώκοντας instead of ἔμπειροι ἧσαν αὐτοῖς οἱ δ.; and here the other construction immediately follows. So too the phrases πλέον ἔχω and πλέον ἐστι are the same. Aristoph. Plut. 531 τί πλέον πλουτεῖν ἐστιν;

τὴν γὰρ ἀνάκρουσιν —for if driven back the A. would not be able to back in any direction except on to the shore, and that only through a short distance and to a small part, namely in the coast-line of their own camp. άνάκρουσις means backing for a new attack.

ἐξωθουμένοις —technical word for being thrust back or ashore in a sea fight, and driven back in a land battle.

ταύτην —sc. τὴν γῆν. Both the distance to the land and the stretch of coast in their power would be small.

ξυμφερομένους . . . ἐς ὀλίγον —forced to meet in a small space.

ταράξεσθαι —passive in sense, ταραχθήσομαι not being used until late Greek.

περιπλεῦσαι δὲ —the enemy would not be able to sail round them into the open water, since they had power to charge from the open sea and to retire.

εὐρυχωρίαν —outside the harbour, =τὸ πέλαγος.

τὴν ἐπίπλευσιν . . . τε καὶ ἀνάκρουσιν —first to charge, and then, when the enemy attempted to sail round them, to retire with the intention of charging again. The two words need not be part of the same movement, although the art. is not repeated.

πολεμίου —even if by quick sailing the A. had it in their power to sail round the Syr., yet they would be caught between the retiring Syr. and the hostile posts at the mouth.

οὐ μεγάλου —thus Plem. and Ortygia controlled the whole width of the mouth.

πρὸς τὴν ἑαυτῶν ἐπιστήμην —in accordance with. according to the standard of ‘their science and strength.’ πρός=pro

ἐπεχείρουν —‘proceeded to attack.

καὶ —accordingly

καθ’ ὅσον . . . αὐτοῦ =κατὰ τοσοῦτο αὐτοῦ ὅσον . . . ἑώρα ‘at that part which faced the city.’ Gylippus would attack the inner side of the A. lines, the troops from the Olympieium the outer side. ὸρᾶν πρὸς =spectare ad. For οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ Ὀ. see c. 4.6.

ἡ γυμνητεία = οἱ γυμνῆτες. They were armed with swords. So Eur. Andr. 1119 uses ἀτευχὴς of one who has laid aside his weapons of defence, but retains his sword.

προσῄει —attracted into the number of γυμνητεία.

οἰόμενοι —the sentence would be more symmetrical with ᾤοντο.

ἐπὶ τὰ τείχη —mounting on the walls.

ἱππέας —Freeman remarks that it is strange that we hear nothing of the A. cavalry.

τῆς δὲ ἡμέρας —after testing each other for a great part of the day by advancing and retiring. προσπλέοντες καὶ ἀ. gives the manner in which they tested each other.

παραλαβεῖν —win.

εἰ μὴ . . . καταδύσαντες —cf. Eur. Med. 369 δοκεῖς γὰρ ἄν με τόνδε θωπεῦσαί ποτε εἰ μή τι κερδαίνουσαν ἢ τεχνωμένην; It is not necessary to supply παρέλαβον.

ἀντίπαλα —that the result of the fighting had been indecisive.

ἐλπίζων —expecting. N. did not desire a fresh engagement; but he knew that the slight success won by the Syr. would prompt them to renew the attack before the A. reinforcements should arrive. Freeman says that it was ‘the obvious A. policy to avoid further action till those reinforcements came.’

τριηράρχους —Diodorus XIII. 10 says the trierarchs were eager for a fresh battle. Plutarch Nic. 20 says the new generals, Menander and Euthydemus, were eager to achieve distinction before Demosthenes should arrive.

ἐπεπονήκει —Pollux gives κακοῦσθαι as an equivalent.

σταυρώματος —this had been made in the spring of 414.

λιμένος κλῃστοῦ —such ‘closed harbours’ were common in Greece. Col. Leake Top. of Athens p. 311 says that ‘the walls, being carried down to either side of the harbour's mouth, were prolonged from thence across the mouth upon shoals, or artifieial moles, until a passage only was left in the middle for two or three triremes abreast between two towers, the opening of which might be further protected by a chain.’ The three harbours of Piraeus—Cantharus, Munichia, Zea—were so closed in 429 B.C.

διαλειπούσας —the transports, two hundred feet apart, were so stationed as to guard the gaps in the σταύρωμα. See on c. 41.1.

καθ’ ἡσυχίαν —nudisturbcd, the regular meaning of the phrase in Thuc. Cf. κατὰ σκότον=clam.

παρασκευαζόμενοι . . . διετέλεσαν —the only instance of διατελῶ with partic, in Thuc. διατελῶ, τυγχάνω, and φαίνομαι are often constructed with adjectives alone, as ἀσφαλέστατος ἂν διατελοίη I. 34.2.

μέχρι νυκτὸς —the art. omitted as usual with words denoting time.

τῆς . . . ὥρας πρῴτερον —lit. earlier in point of time, as in τότε τοῦ χειμῶνος.

ἐπιχειρήσει —mode of attack.

πρὶν δὴ —introduees the decisive moment, as δὴ often does.

Ἀρίστων . . . ἄριστος ὢν —a curious paronomasia. It is not probable that it is accidental, since Thuc. is clearly rather fond of this ‘figure’ (σχῆμα λέξεως), as may be seen from a few instances in this book: (1) c. 70.8 φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν (this is traductio); (2) c. 85.3 οὐ πολὺ . . . πολύ; (3) c. 55.1 μέγας . . μείζων, and c. 68.2 ἐχθροὶ καὶ ἔχθιστοι; (4) c. 70.4 ἐμβολαὶ . . προσβολαί; (5) c. 81.5 ἀποκινδυνεύειν . . . ἀπονενοημένους; (6) c. 21.3 τολμηροὺς . . . ἀντιτολμῶντας, c. 42.2 παρατείχισμα . . . περιτείχισμα, c. 69.2 ἐπιφανεῖς . . . άφανίζειν; (7) c. 39.2 , αὖθις καὶ αὐθήμερον. The present ex. may be compared with the frequent plays on names in the Tragedians, e.g. Pentheus and πένθος Eur. Ba. 367.

τοὺς . . . ἐπιμελομένους —i.e. the ἀγορανόμοι. Of Athens, Aristot. Ath. Pol. c. 51 says κληροῦνται δὲ καὶ ἀγορανόμοι . . . τούτοις δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν νόμων προστέτακται τῶν ὠνίων ἐπιμελεῖσθαι πάντων.

τῶν πωλουμένων —provisions for sale. Cf. Polyb. 1, 18 παῤείλετο τὰς ἀγορὰς καὶ τὴν τῶν ἀναγκαίων χορηγίαν. 14-15.

παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν μεταστῆσαι —Bekker, Arnold, and edd. generally read μεταναστήσαντας ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν κομίσαι, with B; some alter μεταναστήσαντας to μεταστήσαντας. Bloomfield rightly objects παρὰ with acens., it is true, ‘personam indicat—non rem—ad quam ahquid movetur’; but ἵστασθαι, τίθεσθαι, ἕζεσθαι are certainly used with παρά, where previous motion is implied. May not the words mean to move and place on the shore?

αὐτοῖς —it hardly seems necessary to alter this to αὐτοῦ with the edd., following Portus. It may be ethic, applying to πάντας .

καὶ οἱ μὲν —the style here becomes animated, the quick succession of events being described in short co-ordinate sentences joined by καί. In II. 21.3 there is a similar series with τε.

l 9.

τὰ ἀμφὶ —ἀμφὶ is not used freely by any prose author but Xen. It is not found in inscriptions, except in metre, and in Aristoph. only when he imitates tragedy. It is used twice by Thuc.

διὰ πολλοῦ θορύβου —adverbial phrase, as in Aristoph. Vcsp. 929 διὰ κενῆς=ἄλλως .

φυλασσόμενοι —watching each other. This is of course not a pure reciprocal use of the middle, the sense of reciprocity comes from ἀλλήλων.

διαμέλλοντας —the change from dat. to accus. does not affect the sense.

κόπῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι —seized, or ‘overcome with weariness.’ So Aesch. Eum. 67 ὕπνῳ ἁλίσκεσθαι. Madvig's ἀναλίσκεσθαι is unnecessary.

ἐκ παρακελεύσεως —cf. II. 92.1 ἀπὸ ἑνὸς κελεύσματος ἐμβοήσαντες.

ἐμβόλων —not from ἐμβολή.

ἐπὶ πολὐ —far into the bows.

αὐτοῖς —ethic, sc. τοῖς Συρακοσίοις.

περιπλέοντες —attributive.

ταρσοὺς —properly of the bones in a bird's wing; hence used of any similar series, as the banks of oars, as here. It is often so used by Polyb. and later authors. The word is frequently referred to by the Atticists.

αὐτῶν —τῶν πλοίων.

διὰ τῶν ὁλκάδων —each of these vessels commanded one of the ἔσπλοι in the σταύρωμα, which, as we infer from c. 38.2, were 200 feet apart. Many edd. ridiculously suppose that the ‘dolphins’ extended over a space of 200 feet, understanding ἔσπλοι to mean the spaces between the transports. But really they are the gaps left in the σταύρωμα, and they were only wide enough to admit a single vessel.

δελφινοφόροι —the ‘dolphins’ served the purpose of the chains by which λιμένες κλῃστοὶ were closed. The κεραῖαι are here beams, not yard-arms.

αὐτῶν ἐγγὺς —near the transports

αὐτοῖς —this dat. is not used outside of naval and military expressions except with αὐτός.

ἀμφοτέρων — i.e the action just ended and that of two days earlier.

τὴν ἐλπίδα . . ἐχυρὰν εἶχον —felt confident

ταῖς μὲν ναυσὶ —strictly τὸν δὲ πεζὸν ought to follow.

κατ’ ἀμφότερα — every preparation was making for another and more decisive attack which should complete the defeat of the invaders by sea and land Freeman .

ἐν τούτῳ —while the Syr. preparations were making.

παραγίγνονται —Plutarch, in a well-known passage, Nic. 21, describes the entrance of the new force into the harbour θεατρικῶς καὶ πρὸς ἔκπληξιν πολεμίων. It is impossible to say why the Syr. did not fight them at the harbour mouth. Perhaps some facts are omitted here.

τρεῖς καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα μάλιστα —the numbers previously given bring the total to seventy-three exactly; but it is unnecessary to omit μάλιστα with B, since Thuc. allows for any possible error in the previous data. Sixty-five sailed from Athens; fifteen from Corcyra; two from Metapontum; one with Eurymedon; total eighty-three; but ten had been given to Conon

ξὺν ταῖς ξενικαῖς —including, the regular Attic meaning, except only in the old phrase σὺν (τοῖς ) θεοῖς σὺν is very rare with persons and never implies a willing connection, in Attic prose after Thuc.; he has ξὺν fanly often with persons, and in cases implying will, viz c. 57; 2.58; III. 90. The latter use is common in tragedy and Xen. In ordinary Attic σὺν is the word for adding together the items of a sum total. ξὺν (τοῖς) ὅπλοις seems to be an old military phrase.

Ἕλληνας. —Ἕλλην can only be used as an adj. with persons.

εἰ πέρας μηδὲν ἔσται —if there is to be no end. Cf. Enr. Med. 931 εἰσῆλθέ μ’ οἶκτος εἰ γενήσεται.

τοῦ ἀπαλλαγῆναι —defines πέρας, an end consisting in deliverance, as in Pindar Pyth. IX. τερπνὰν γάμου κραίνειν τελευταν, and in the Homeric τέλος θανάτοιο, γάμοιο.

ὁρῶντες —anacoluthon, as though the preceding clause had been οἱ Σ. κατεπλάγησαν. Cf. II. 53 νόμος οὐδεὶς ἀπεῖργε, τὸ μεν κρίνοντες, for ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς νόμου ἀπείργοντο Such a slight irregularity is not uncommon in tragedy, as Eur. Hec. 971 αἰδὡς μ’ ἐχει . . . τυγχάνουσα. Plato Phaedo 81A ὑπάρχει αὐτῇ εύδαίμονι εἶναι . . . διάγουσα 14-5.

διὰ τὴν Δ. τειχιζομένην —see on c. 28.4,

ἴσον καὶ παραπλήσιον —cf. c. 78 τοιαῦτά τε καὶ παραπλήσια .

πανταχόσε —i.e. in whatever direction it was exerted, whether in Attica itself or outside it. So πανταχόθεν in II. 53.3 means from whatever source it was obtained.

πολλὴν φαινομένην —the same omission of the partic, as in c. 21.3; 27.1 al. 19

ὡς ἐκ κακῶν ῥώμη —i.e. as compared with their troubles, it was positive ῥώμη; cf. c. 76 ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων ἑθάρσυνε. ἐκ here describes the source of the ῥώμη, ὡς is ‘considering that.’

οὐχ οἷόν τε εἶναι —prob. Thuc. meant to say ‘it was impossible for him to delay without experiencing’; this would require either οὐχ οἶόν τε εἶναι διατρίβειν μέν, παθεῖν δὲ μή, or οὐχ οἶόν τε εἶναι διατρίβοντα μὴ οὐ παθεῖν. But the words as they stand mean it is impossible to delay and to suffer, and this, after all, is more mcisive than ‘it is impossible to delay, and then not to suffer.’

φοβερός —with ἀφικόμενος. The act, sense of φοβερός, causing terror, is the commoner. The passive meaning timid occurs in II. 3.4; IV. 128.4; Soph. OT 153 φοβερὰν φρένα δείματι πάλλων.

αὐτοὺς —object of ὠφελεῖν, the subject of which is τὸ μεταπέμψαι.

ταῦτα —there is a similar parenthesis followed by ταῦτα δὲ πάντα σκοπῶν in Andoc. I. 58 fol.

οὖν —resumes after the long parenthesis, just as igitur, sed, autem are commonly used, e.g. Cic. pro Mur. 50 meministis enim, cum illius nefarii gladiatoris voces percrebruissent . . . tum igitur, his rebus auditis meministis.

τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ μάλιστα δεινότατος —this is labelled as an instance of the double superl., as in Eur. Med. ὦ μέγιστον ἐχθίστη γύναι, but Classen rightly takes μάλιστα closely with τῇ πρώτη? ἡμέρᾳ, for ‘especially on the first day’; but, if he understood the passage, he did not make it clear. Why are there three superlatives, πρώτη?, μάλιστα, δεινότατος? Thuc. surely means that D. saw after his arrival that the nearer the day of his arrival was the greater was the awe he inspired. Hence trans. ‘realising that at present, while his arrival was quite recent, he filled the enemy with awe.’

μάλιστα —serves to bring the two superlatives, πρώτῃ and δεινότατος, into relation. The whole is an example of his love of elaborate, composite, and co-ordinate expressions instead of subordinate clauses. For the use of superlatives in such expressions, cf. II. 11.1 ἐπὶ πόλιν δυνατωτάτην νῦν ἐρχόμεθα, καὶ αὐτοὶ πλεῖστοι καὶ ἄριστοι στρατεύοντες, and perhaps the constant use of μάλἰστα in ‘proportions,’ as in II. 47.4 μάλιστα ἔθνη?σκον ὅσῳ καὶ μἀλιστα προσῇσαν .

ὅτι τάχος —found also in Herod. 9.33, and equivalent to ὡς τάχος=ὡς τάχιστα.

αὖθις —then.

ὑπομεῖναι —often contrasted with φεύγειν, either of soldiers or litigants who stand a trial; sometimes it is joined with καρτερεῖν. It generally implies danger.

ἐπιθέσθαι τῇ πείρᾳ —a graphic expression for setting to work with a will.

οἱ —the only case of the sing. of this pron. at all frequent in prose. Even this is usually avoided by the Orators.

ξυντομωτάτην κ.τ.λ. —he thought that (therein) lay the means of finishing the war most quickly. (Classen rightly objects to inserting ταύτην after ξυντομωτάτην with Madvig. It is perfeetly natural to supply τὸ ἐπιθέσθαι τῆ? πείρᾳ with ἡγεῖτο.)

l 46

ἢ ἀπάξειν —the suppression of the alternative to κατορθώσας is a fine effeet.

τρίψεσθαι —passive.

ἐπεκράτουν — had the upper hand. Freeman .

οὐδὲ γὰρ καθ’ ἕτερα =κατ’ οὐδέτερα.

ὅτι μὴ —except.

μηχαναῖς —Freeman says ‘it is strange that we have heard so little of engines of this kind during the whole war’ in Sicily. ‘They have not been mentioned before exeept when Nicias used them as materials for a fire’ (VI. 101).

παρατειχίσματος —N. in his letter had said that it was necessary to capture the ἐγκάρσιον τεῖχος πολλῇ στρατιᾷ ἐπελθών. The first attaek was made on the south side.

ξυνάρχοντας —Eurymedon, Menander, Euthydemus.

ὡς ἐπενόει, καὶ —καὶ marks the carrying out of the plan that had been formed. In this idiom the rel. sense of ὡς, as, is hardly distinguishable from the temporal.

τὴν ἐπιχείρησιν — they were to strive to win their way on the north side by the path by which he (Nicias) had first made a lodgment for the invaders on the hill of Syraeuse. Freeman .

ἀδύνατα —the plur. marks the details of a complex aetion.

ἡμερῶν —gen. of measure, as constantly in expressions of magnitude.

τοξευμάτων —we expect rather a mention of some engine used in the destruction of walls, and it is just possible that τόξευμα here denotes a machine of some kind. The proposals are μοχλευμάτων Madvig, λαξευμάτων Meineke, τειχομάχων Widmann. 15

ἢν κρατῶσι —the pres. is used because κρατεῖν = to be master, like νικῶ. Otherwise the aor. would be necessary.

ἀπὸ πρώτου ὕπνου —concubia nocte; cf. περὶ πρῶτον ὕπνον II. 2.1; ἀπὸ τρίτης ὡρας Aets XXIII. 23. When the art, is omitted with expressions of time, a preposition is usually present, except with νυκτός, ἡμέρας .

τὴν πεζὴν —i.e. the foot at large who were able to take part. Some were left to guard the works. (The true reading πεζὴν eomes from Plut. Nic. 21.)

ἐν τοῖς τείχεσιν —it has been generally assumed that, since the completion of the Syr. eross - wall, the A. had abandoned the κύκλος altogether, and held only the low ground at the south; but there is no evidence for this, and probably Freeman is right in assuming that N. still guarded the Fort.

ὑπελείπετο —Classen well says that the imperf. refers to his task of guarding the lines.

ῃπερ καὶ ἡ προτέρα —referring to the ascent of the A. in the spring of 414.

τὸ τείχισμα —i.e. a fort on Euryelus, built by Gylippus and forming the western extremity of his cross-wall.

προτειχίσμασιν —defensive ‘outworks’ on the north side of the cross-wall.

τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις —a chosen band of hoplites now under the command of Hermociates. They had been appointed to keep a look-out on Epipolae in 414.

ἀμυνομένους —accus. because it is object of ἔτρεψαν only. Contrast c. 53.2 προσπεσόντες τοῖς πρώτοις τρέπουσι.

τοῦ περαίνεσθαι —that by means of the present impulse they might not be slow in the execution of the purpose for which they had come. The infin. is passive and depends on βραδεῖς γένωνται=ὑστερήσωσι .

ἄλλοι δὲ —i.e. others than Demosth. and his division.

ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης —temporal, ‘in the first instance.’ If τὸ ἀπὸ τῆς π. παρατείχισμα be retained with the MSS., the meaning is ‘the original cross-wall’; but there seems to be no reason why the cross-wall should be so qualified. There is no subsequently built wall with which it is contrasted.

οἱ δὲ Συρακόσιοι — while the invaders were still engaged on their attempt on the wall (ἥ?ρουν . . . καὶ . . . ἀπέσυρον), the garrisons of the other forts came forth to attack them. Freeman .

διὰ παντὸς τοῦ μήπω μεμαχημένου —those parts of the army which had not yet come into action; neut. collective, as often.

διελθεῖν —force their way through. ‘They feared,’ says Freeman, ‘lest, if they relaxed for a moment, the whole force of the defenders should turn and come together against them.’

οἱ Βοιωτοὶ —i.e. the Thespians who in a single ship had met the Syracusan fleet at Locri (c. 25.3). The majority of the three hundred Bocotians referred to in c. 19.3 had not yet reached Syr. See c. 50.1.

ἣν —with reference to which, accus. de quo.

πυθέσθαι —referring to his own investigations in Sicily.

οὐδ’ ἀφ’ ἑτέρων —cf. c. 42.6.

ἕκαστα —the details. ἕκαστος is as usual in the subordinate clause, and so is nom., though it is in apposition to ἥν.

ξυνηνέχθη =ξυνέβη. The word is lonic in this meaning. Cf. ξυμφορά. The use is found in Herod., Thuc., and late authors like Lucian, Appian.

σαφέστερα μέν —sc. ἐστὶν ἕκαστα.

οἶδεν —sense requires the sing. here, because οἰ παραγενόμενοι are considered separately; but when the individuals all act alike, the verb with ἕκαστος is in plur.

ἔν γε τῷδε τῷ πολέμῳ —i.e. as contrasted with other wars; whereas ὁ πόλεμος ὅδε implies no antithesis.

πῶς ἄν τις —another question comes in 67, 2. The question is one of the σχήματα διανοίας—figures of thought—like irony, oxymoron. They are not common in early prose; far less so than the σχήματα λέξεως—figures of speech—like antithesis, paronomasia—which themselves become commoner later.

ἑώρων . . . οὕτως . . . ὡς . . εἰκὸς τὴν μὲν ὄψιν . . . προορᾶν, τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν . . . ἀπιστεῖσθαι —though we have no such idiom, yet in Greek there is certainly not an ellipse of ὸρᾶν after εἰκός, as the edd. say. In the case of correlatives, the explanation which we put in earlier is often deferred to the relative clause. So here the contrast between ὄψιν and γνῶσιν is deferred to the ὡς clause. Traus. ‘as was natural for them to see in the moonlight, they saw the outline of a figure in front without being able to distinguish whether it was that of a friend.’ This idiom is very common with τοσοῦτον . . . ὅσον, and is often misunderstood. (Cf. v. 95 οὐ τοσοῦτον ἡμᾶς βλάπτει ἡ ἔχθρα ὑμῶν ὅσον ἡ φιλία μὲν ἀσθενείας, τὸ δὲ μῖσος δυνάμεως παράδειγμα τοῖς ἀρχομένοις δηλούμενον, where a reference to ἡ φιλία is at first sight expected in the τοσοῦτον clause. The idiom with οὐχ ὥσπερ is similar, as Aristoph. Eq. 784 οὐχ ὥσπερ ἐγὼ ῥαψάμενός σοι τουτὶ φέρω=‘he does bring you this as I do.’)

ὄψιν —outline. Cf. Plat. Rep. 376B ὄψιν φίλην καὶ ἐχθρὰν διακρίνει. 12-3.

τὴν δὲ γνῶσιν τοῦ οἰκείου ἀπιστεῖσθαι —lit. that their recognition of friends should be distrusted τοῦ οἰκείου is neut. collective, as in c. 43.7. Classen takes it to mean what was peculiar in contrast to τοῦ σώματος.

τῇ πρώτῃ ἐφόδῳ —with their first impulse.

πρὸς ὅ τι χρὴ χωρῆσαι —which division they should join χρὴ after rel. words is very common; e.g. II. 4 ᾗ χρὴ σωθῆναι.

τὰ πρόσθεν —those in front had become completely disorganised and were difficult to distinguish. Cf. c. 14.2 χαλεπαὶ ἄρξαι .

κραυγῇ . . . χρώμενοι —so c. 71.5 and II. 4.2. There are κεκραγμός, κέκραγμα and κραυγή in Attic.

οἵ τε Ἀθηναῖοι —answers οἵ τε γὰρ Σ. above.

πᾶν τὸ ἐξ ἐναντίας —all who came towards them. For the neut. collective with adverb cf II. 45.1 τὸ μὴ ἐκποδὼν . . . τετίμηται.

τῶν ἤδη πάλιν φευγόντων —belonging to those who were already in flight.

αὐτὸ =τὸ ξύνθημα.

ἐκείνων —applying to the enemy, as often. Both ἐκεῖνος and αὐτὸς here and again in l. 38 are used of the same people. This is very common.

ἐντύχοιεν —sc. οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι;

διέφευγον —sc. οί πολέμιοι.

ὑποκρίνοιντο —answer; only here in Thuc. It is Ionic; common in Herod.: Aristoph. Acharn. 401, and late authors.

φόβον παρεῖχε —sc αὐτὸ, i.e. τὸ παιανίζειν .

οἵ τε πολέμιοι —what is to be supplied?

φίλοι τε φίλοις —polyptoton.

κατὰ . . . κρημνῶν —ῥίπτειν ἀπὸ is found only in late Greek 52

πάλιν καταβάσεως —cf. c. 62 τὴν πάλιν ἀνάκρουσιν.

τὸ ὁμαλὸν — the flat ground between the hill and the bay of Trôgilos. The men of the first armament, who had learned the he of the land on both sides of the hill, knew the roads, and contrived to make their way round to the A. quarters. Freeman . They had ascended Epipolae in 414.

διεφύγγανον —The form φυγγάνω is occasionally found even in the Orators.

ᾗ ἡ πρόσβασις —sc. ἐστί, i.e. where the ascent to E. is. For the omission of the verb in rel. clauses cf. c. 11.4.

ὅπλα —here ‘shields’; it is often so used by Herod. So arma in contrast with tela.

αὖ —again referring to c. 41.4 τὴν ἐλπίδα ἤδη ἐχυρὰν εἶχον.

Ἀκράγαντα —it was neutial See c. 33. There was now a party favourable to Syracuse in the city; hence the mission of Sicanus, who had been appointed general with Hermocrates in the winter of 415. Acragas did not however join Syr. See c. 50.

αὖθις —he had gone once before; see c. 7.

ἐν ἐλπίδι ὢν —cf. c. 25.1. Here it is constructed as ἐλπίζω.

πρός τε — with reference to. Freeman well says that we must remember the old εὐτυχία of Nicias. This remembrance it was which increased the vexation of the troops.

ἀρρωστίαν —medical term. Here in moral sense, as in III. 15.2.

ἀχθομένους —two reasons are given: (1) νόσῳ ἐπιέζοντο, (2) τὰ ἄλλα ἀνέλπιστα . . . ἐφαίνετο.

νόσῳ —esp. those encamped between the double walls below the cliff.

κατ’ ἀμφότερα —for two reasons, which are then given, viz. (1) the season, (2) the place.

οὔσης . . . χαλεπὸν ἦν —see on c. 13.2. 10

χαλεπὸν —unhealthy, like βαρυς, gravis. The unhealthiness of the marshy ground made it difficult to lay siege to Syracuse by land. The Romans found this out in 212, Livy 24.26 tempore autumni et locis natura gravibus, multo tamen magis extra urbem quam in urbe, intoleranda vis aestus omnium ferme corpora movit.

ἀνέλπιστα —the pessimism that usually accompanies bad health.

ἐς τὰς Ἐ. διεκινδύνευσεν —the edd. compare III. 36.2 ἐς Ἰωνίαν παρακινδυνεῦσαι.

τοῦ στρατεύματος —partitive after ναυσί: ‘so long as it was possible to prevail at least with that part of the fleet that had come to reinforce them.’

l. 20

ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ —at Decelea.

ἢ Συρακοσίους —the preposition omitted in the second clause after a comparative. Cf. V. 111 αἰσχύνην αἰσχίω μετ’ ἀνοίας ἢ τύχης προσλαβεῖν.

οὓς . . . ῥάδιον εἶναι —cf. I. 91.5 ὅσα μετ’ ἐκείνων βουλεύεσθαι; II. 13.5 οἷς χρήσεσθαι, and 102 λέγεται . . . ὄτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι. This attraction of short rel. clauses in Oratio Obliqua into infin. is less rare in Greek than in Lat. (qui=et is is different). Thuc. has nine instances. Cf. Roby, II. § 1677.

εἰκὸς εἶναι —decere.

ἐνόμιζε μὲν —Freeman says rightly, ‘They were, he allowed, in evil case; but it would not do openly to proclaim the fact.’ In his speech in the council N did not disguise his opinion. Hence in ἐνόμιζε μὲν . . . τῷ δὲ λόγῳ the antithesis is not so much between what he thought and what he said, as between what he both thought and admitted in the council and the impression which he wished his words to produce outside the council. His admission was to be kept secret.

πόνηρα —here bears the sense calamitous, dangerous, like our word evil, as in the phrase in evil case. Bloomfield. See not. crit., for the accent.

τῷ δὲ λόγῳ —by his speech, with ἀποδεικνύναι. It was not to be publicly known that he felt they were in evil case; nor was a report to reach the enemy that they were openly voting for a retreat.

ἐμφανῶς —with ψηφιζομένους. This seems to be merely a plea for secrecy by Nieias. He urged that if they voted for retreat, every one would know of it and so the enemy would hear about it.

μετὰ πολλῶν —has been thought to refer to a subsequent and larger council to be held, at which the taxiarchs would attend; but prob. N. only means that if they voted for retreat, their vote would accord with the opinion of many in command, and that the enemy would hear that this was so.

καταγγέλτους γίγνεσθαι —cf. III. 30.1 ἐκπύστους γενέσθαι, γίγνομαι making a passive with verbal adjs.

λαθεῖν —antithesis to ἐμφανῶς and = μὴ φανεροὶ γενέσθαι.

τοῦτο ποιοῦντες —the edd. all say this means άναχωροῦντες. But it should be ψηφιζόμενοι τὴν άναχώρησιν. N. urges that no formal vote may be now taken, because every one must know of it. ‘Let us wait, and decide the matter in secret and informally should retreat become necessary’ He is not at present dealing with the question of retreating immediately, but is arguing on the assumption that an immediate retreat is impossible. Cf. c. 50, ll. 30, 31.

ποιοῦντες — ἐβούλετο is here lost sight of, and the Obliqua is used. Nicias is part of the subject, and so the nom. is possible.

τὸ δέ τι —Thuc. has told us why N. objected to an open vote, and now proceeds to explain why N. thought an immediate retreat unnecessary, and indeed impossible. This is shown below by ἢν καρτερῶσι προσκαθήμενοι as distinct from οὐδ’ ἐμφανῶς σφᾶς ψηφιζομένους κ.τ.λ. above.

ἀφ’ ὧν —judging from private (ἐπὶ πλέον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι) information that he received of them. ἀφ’ ὧν . . . αυτῶν= ἀπ’ ἐκείνων ἃ αὐτῶν, and αὐτῶν is neut., referring to τὰ τῶν πολεμίων .

ἐλπίδος τι —cf. c. 69 λαμπ ρότητός τι.

χρημάτων γὰρ —they would wear out the Syr. by want of supplies.

θαλασσοκρατούντων —sc. σφῶν; the gen. abs. in spite of the subject being the same as that of ἐκτρυχώσειν. This has the effect of strongly emphasising the participial clause and of contrasting the position of the A. with that of the Syr. (Hw. here reads θαλασσοκρατοῦντες; Stahl inserts σφῶν, and it is not quite clear that any of the passages where this construction occurs are parallel to this one.) The same phenomenon appears in Latin; e.g. Livy 23.24.10 pontem fluminis petentes, obsesso ante ab hostibus ponte.

ἦν γάρ τι —cf. c. 4.2 .

τὰ πράγματα ἐνδοῦναι —place the government in their hands.

ἐπεκηρυκεύετο —the subject must be taken from the paren thesis, just as the ohject is in III. 70.3 καί (ἦν γὰρ Πειθίας . . .) ὑπάγουσιν αὐτόν .

οὐκ εἴα —urged him not.

ἃ ἐπιστάμενος —sums up the motives that prompted Nicias. Cf. I. 42 ὧν ἐνθυμηθέντες; VI. 60 ὧν ἐνθυμούμενοι.

τῷ μὲν ἔργῳ . . . τῷ δ’ ἐ. . . . λόγῳ —the antithesis occurs about fifty times in Thuc. ‘In reality he held back, inclining both ways and considering, but in his public speech at the time.’

ἐπ’ ἀμφότερα ἔχων —on the analogy of ἔχειν with adverbs.

τῷ δ’ ἐμφανεῖ —then follows the summary of his official speech. As Thuc has such a clear knowledge of the motives given above, we may assume that Nicias began by making admissions which he did not wish to be taken as part of his ἐμφανὴς λόγος. (We could scarcely suppose that Thuc., sympathising with N., merely inferred his motives)

σφῶν —in them; for the constrn. Fr. Muller compares θαυμάζειν τί τινος .

ὥστε —introduces the epexegesis of ταῦτα; cf. II. 40.3 διαφερόντως γὰρ καὶ τόδε ἔχομεν ὥστε τολμᾶν , namely that they should depart without an order from them.

καὶ γὰρ οὐ τοὺς αὐτοὺς —we shall not, he said, ‘then have the same body of persons both voting about ourselves and making up their minds from seeing the facts with their own eyes as we do instead of merely hearing them from the faultfinding of others.’ For τῶν αύτῶν cf. I. 22.3 οὐ ταὐτὰ περὶ τῶν αύτῶν ἔλεγον, ἀλλ’ ὡς ἑκατέρων τις εὐνοίας ἢ μνήμης ἔχοι; III. 56.7.

ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ —sc. ὁρῶσιν. But the accus. might be used with ὥσπερ, corresponding with ὁρῶντας .

ἐξ ὧν ἄν τις —they will let themselves be persuaded by the calumnies of a clever speaker. With εὖ λέγων διαβάλλειν cf. καλῶς ἐπιτιμᾶν III. 38.4; εὖ διαβαλὼν III. 42.2.

καὶ —immo.

ὑπὸ χρημάτων —been bribed to turn traitors and depart.

ἐπιστάμενος —the timidity of Nicias in this matter is in marked contrast with the outspoken boldness of Pericles. Thirlwall doubted whether N. really feared the A. so much as he professed to do.

ἐπ’ αἰσχρᾷ τε αἰτίᾳ —viz. on a γραφὴ προδοσίας, which might be brought by any citizen even against a general by means of an impeachment ( εἰσαγγελία) in the Ecclesia. The penalties were very severe, involving death, confiscation, and burial outside the state, ἀτιμία for the convict's descendants, and the entry of the man's name on a black list. The case would be tried before the Thesmothetae, who also superintended the εύθυναι—accounts—of retiring στρατηγοί, and a Court of heliasts.

μᾶλλον ἢ κ.τ.λ. —he would sooner run the risk, and die on his own account at the hands of the enemy, if die he must.

ἰδίᾳ —there is no need to suspect this word with Kr. and Hw.; to die at the hands of the public executioner is δημοσίᾳ ἀποθανεῖν; N. desires to die otherwise. There is also abundant evidence that difficulties arising at Athens out of the στρατηγία were regarded as especially δημόσια.

ἔφη —when long passages of Oratio Obliqua are attempted in Greek, the verb of ‘saying’ is frequently repeatcd. The structure of this c. is similar to II. 13.

ξενοτροφοῦντας —these mercenaries were partly Sicel, partly Arcadian. Mercenary service was traditional among the Arcadians. It only became general in Greece after the Pel. war. The Pel. employed many—probably 3000—in 426 against Demosthenes in Aetolia, and Brasidas had 1000 in Thrace. Cf. c. 19.4.

ἐν περιπολίοις —forts for the protection of the open country, with home-garrisons, as distinct from στρατειαί. Cf. VI. 45 of the Syr., ἐς τὰ περιπόλια τὰ ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ φρουρὰς ἐσεκόμιζον.

ἔτι —besides.

βόσκοντας —when used of men, βόσκειν implies contempt or trouble. Cf. Herod. VI. 39 βόσκων ἐπικούρους. The participles belong to ἀπορεῖν and ἀμηχανήσειν alike.

τὰ μὲν ἀπορεῖν κ.τ.λ. —were in difficulties, and would hereafter be at a loss. ἀπορεῖν refers to want of money, ἀμηχανήσειν to the diminution of their παρασκευὴ which would result from this ἀπορία .

ἔτι —with the future is used thus in threats and prophecies.

ἤν τε . . . ἐκλίπωσι —contrast c. 13.1 εἰ ἀφαιρήσομέν τι καὶ βραχὺ τῆς τηρήσεως, and see on c. 8.1 for the difference in the protasis.

τῆς νῦν παρασκευῆς —their present forces, depending on ὀτιοῦν. Of course the forces would fall off if the pay were not forthcoming.

ἐπικουρικὰ —mercenaries would serve for anyone that hired them. But the Athenians served δῑ ἀνάγκης, as men compellcd by law and duty.

τρίβειν —remain; cf. c. 49.2.

καὶ μὴ χρήμασιν, ὧν κ.τ.λ. —and not to leave defeated by the money of an enemy than whom they were far better off. χρήμασιν, ὧν = χρήμασιν ἐκείνων ὧν. Nicias has alluded in χρήματα only to the financial straits of the enemy, and adroitly says ‘are wc to let ourselves be beaten by an enemy who, even if he is for the moment stronger, is yet so much poorer that he must lose if we remain?’ (Other edd. take χρήμασιν differently. Most reject ὧν of B and either render ὡς since, or alter it. Thuc does not use ὡς since with indic. elsewhere.)

ὧν —antecedent omitted. This cannot be connected with νικηθέντας, as νικᾶν with gen. is exclusively poetical.

πολὺ κρείσσους —Herbst says that πολλῷ κρείσσους is always used by Thuc. for to be much better off, and that πολὺ κρείσσους=νικᾶν. But here νικᾶν is itself used in a metaphorical sense, of being beaten by money. And Nicias chooses words which will bear both senses, as they help to disgnise the weakness of the A.

ἰσχυρίζετο —spoke confidently. 2

αἰσθόμενος . . . ὅτι —a substantive clause after αἰσθάνομαι is not very common; cf. I. 50; II. 88.1; the partic. is far commoner.

ὥστε —see on c. 48.3.

καὶ ἅμα —the construction is again changed from partic. to finite verb. Cf. c. 47.2 .

ταῖς γοῦν ναυσὶν —in the fleet at least he retained his old confidence.

[κρατηθείς] —it is not likely that Thuc. said this of Nicias, who had taken no part in the night attack. Nowhere else does he use κρατεῖν except of a general actually leading his men. We should also require parallels to ἐθάρσει κρατηθείς for ‘he felt confident though he had been defeated.’ As the passage is clearly corrupt, we may safely omit the word. (Widmann reads (μᾶλλον) θαρσήσας ἣ πρότερον κρατηθείς, and Sitzler (μᾶλλον) θαρσῶν, ἢ πρότερον ἐθάρσησε κρατηθείς.)

ἄνευ Ἀ. ψηφίσματος —cf. ἄνευ Λακεδαιμονίων I. 128; οὐ μετὰ τοῦ πλήθους ὑμῶν III. 66.

τρίβειν αὐτοῦ —remain in Sicily.

Θάψον . . . ἢ . . . Κατάνην — there they would have the open sea and all the advantages which the open sea gave to the A. tactics. There they would . . . maintain themselves by harrying the territory of the enemy. Freeman .

οὐκ . . . ἀλλ’ —cf. Eur. Ion 131 οὐ θνατοῖς ἀλλ’ ἀθανάτοις.

τὰ τῆς ἐμπειρίας χ —the advantages of skill will be theirs.

ἀναχωρήσεις κ τ.λ. —chiasmus, ἀναχωρήσεις corresponding to καταίροντες, ἐπίπλους to ὁρμώμενοι .

καταίροντες —sc. ἐς βραχὺ καὶ περιγραπτόν.

μέλλειν —cf. Eur. Heraclid. 132 σὸν δὴ τὸ φράζειν ἐστὶ μὴ μέλλειν τ’.

μέλλησις —cf Aristoph. Av. 639 οὐχὶ νυστάζειν ἔτι | ὥρα στιν ημῖν οὐδὲ μελλονικιᾶν .

ἐνεγένετο —cf. VIII. 9 διατριβῆς ἐγγιγνομένης .

ὑπόνοια μή —as though ὑπόνοια were φόβος. Cf. III. 53 ὑποπτεύομεν μὴ οὐ κοινοὶ ἀποβῆτε.

κατὰ χώραν ἔμενον —a common phrase. (Stein on Herod. III. 135, Kock on Aristoph. Eq. 1354.)

Γύλιππος —see c. 46.

ἡ τοῖς Σ. στάσις φιλία —for the order cf. on c. 23.3. ‘The party favourable to the S. had been expelled.’ Cf. Aesch. PB 127 φιλία γὰρ ἅδε τάξις ; Choeph. 458 στάσις δὲ πάγκοινος ἅδ’ ἐπιρροθεῖ.

τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Π —see c. 19.3.

l 10.

ἀπενεχθέντες —by had weather.

Εὐεσπερίταις —afterwards one of five towns called the Pentapolis of Cyrene. In 401 it was again attacked by Libyans, and offered citizenship to any Greek who would come to its aid. Many of the Messenians, expelled from Naupactus by the Spartans, went there. Paus. IV. 26; Diod. 14.34.

δύο ἡ —gen. of measure and epexegetic of ἐλάχιστον.

ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιον χωροῦντα —improving.

χαλεπώτερον ἴσχοντα —a substitute for χαλεπωτέρως ἔχοντα.

ὁμοίως —as before.

ἀλλ’ ἢ —except.

μὴ φανερῶς . . . ψηφίζεσθαι —see on c. 48.1. No formal vote was to be passed.

προεῖπον ὡς ἐδύναντο κ.τ.λ. —they gave notice as secretly as possible to all.

παρασκευάσασθαι —to prepare (to depart) when the sign was given. The sentence would be clearer if he had said ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀδηλότατα παρασκευάσασθαι ἔκπλουν ποιησομένους ὅταν τις ς.; but it is easy to supply ἐκπλευσομένους from ἐκπλοῦν after παρασκευάσασθαι. (The preliminary arrangements are not denoted by παρασκευάσασθαι but are implied clearly enough in προεῖπον ἔκπλουν. So in VI. 65 προεῖπον πανδημεὶ πᾶσιν ἐξιέναι Συρακοσίοις. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἑτοῖμα αὐτοῖς καὶ τὰ τῆς παρασκευῆς ἦν κ τ.λ.; there too προεῖπον ἐξιέναι implies preparation for the expedition. Here παρασκευάσασθαι applies to such final arrangements as can only be made when the final order is given. There is no need to alter the aor. into the perf., as some of the edd. do.)

τις —added to σημήνῃ because the sign was to be given not by herald, but secretly

ἡ σελήνη ἐκλείπει —eclipses of sun or moon were deemed ominous. Plnt. Nic. 23 says that even οὶ πολλοὶ knew in the time of Nicias that eclipses of the sun were a natural phenomenon; but this is very doubtful. What was known about them was due to the teaching of Anaxagoras. Plut. Per. 35 ; de superstit. c. 7 .

ἐτύγχανε . . . οὖσα —Thuc. uses the imperf. of τυγχάνω with pres. or perf.; with aor. only in VIII. 105. See on c. 4.3.

ἐνθύμιον ποιούμενοι —took it to heart.

ἦν . . . προσκείμενος —the tense of εἰμὶ must precede the participle in this periphrasis, as it is emphatic, representing a state of things existing at the time referred to. Cf. II. 67 ἦν . . . πολιορκοῦν; 2.80 ἦσαν . . . ξυμπροθυμούμενοι.

τι καὶ ἄγαν κ τ.λ. —cf Intr. p. XXXV. Plutarch says that Stilbides had lately died.

οὐδ’ ἂν διαβουλεύσασθαι —he would not even enter into any further discussion as to how he should move until . . .

πρὶν . . . μεῖναι —here πριν has the infin., though a negative precedes. This happens when something positive is insisted on; as here the fact that he would remain so long.

ἐξηγοῦντο —technical word for interpretation by priests. Cf. Andoc. I. 116 ἐξηγῇ Κηρύκων ὤν, οὐχ ὅσιον ὄν.

τρὶς ἐννέα —Plutarch says that the priests only required nine days, but Nicias insisted on staying for a whole revolution of the moon.

μελλήσασι —refers to the delay that had been rendered necessary by the eclipse, before they had decided how long to remain. ὴ μονὴ on the contrary refers to the definite stay of twenty-seven days. But they had only stayed a few days when they were attacked. ‘And so the A., after delaying for this reason, had resolved to remain.’

ἐπηρμένοι ἦσαν —felt eneouraged.

μὴ ἀνιέναι τὰ τῶν Ἀ —not to relax their hold upon the A., i e. to keep them busy instead of disregarding them. Hence—§ 2—τὰς ναῦς ἐπλήρουν. Cf. VI. 18 τοῖς μὲν ἐπιβουλεύειν, τοὺς δὲ μὴ ἀνιέναι; II. 13 τὰ τῶν ξυμμάχων διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν.

αὐτῶν κατεγνωκότων —since they had themselves come to the conclusion that they were no longer superior to them (σφῶν). καταγιγνώσκειν is used for forming an adverse opinion. κατάγνωσις has a similar sense. Cf. III. 45.1.

ἐπιβουλεῦσαι —made plans. Cf. III. 109.3 τὴν ἀναχώρησιν ἐπιβουλεύειν.

καὶ ἅμα —adds another reason

ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀ —see on c. 7.4.

ἐπειδὴ δὲ κ.τ.λ. — the first attack was made by land on the A. wall, clearly on the outer side, by the horsemen and others from the Olympieion. Freeman , who views the whole engagement as fought south of Epipolae. But c. 54 l. 3 and c. 60.2 l. 9 prove that the attack began on Epipolae.

οὔσης δὲ στενῆς —the pursuit was prob. near the Harbour. In that swampy ground the solid path was narrow, and so was the entrance to the A. camp. Freeman .

ἵππους —apparently he does not know how many riders were killed. Donbtless in the confusion some escaped.

ταῖς τε ναυσὶν —the Syr. had not ventured to attack the A. by sea since the arrival of Eurymcdon and Demosthenes.

τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας —this was at the south and therefore projected towards Dascon bay.

ἐπεξάγοντα —as he was drawing off so as to surround the enemy's left. Bloomfield.

ἀπολαμβάνουσι —after defeating the A. centre, the Syr. centre was able to join in the attack on Eurymedon.

κοίλῳ —i.e. Dascon bay.

τὰς μετ’ αὐτοῦ ν. ἐπισπομένας —cf. μετὰ Ἀθηναίων ἠκολούθουν c. 57.9. Diodorus says that seven A. ships were here sunk.

Γύλιππος —he had remained on shore, where Demosthenes kept a look-out on him.

ἔξω τῶν σταυρωμάτων —i.e. to the south-west of their palisade; they were chased to the muddy shore and the shallow waters between it and the promontory of Daskôn. Freeman .

τῆς γῆς φιλίας οὔσης —i.e. that part of the land which lay south-west of the A. lines, and so the very part on to which the A. ships were being carried.

τὴν χηλὴν —a mole running along the coast between the shore and the marsh Lysimeleia.

οἱ Τυρσηνοί —the Etruscans were old enemies to Syracusan trade and naval power, and had consequently sent aid to Athens in the expedition.

ταύτῃ —close up by the A. lines where they reached the mole.

ἐπιβοηθήσαντες καὶ δείσαντες —fearing for their ships and coming to their aid. Thuc. often thus co-ordinates effect and cause, placing the causal partic. second, as in VIII. 7.1 ἐπειγομένων τῶν Χίων ἀποστεῖλαι τὰς ναῦς καὶ δεδιότων μὴ οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι αἴσθωνται.

ξυνήγαγον κατὰ τὸ ς. —brought them within the shelter of their lines, i e. within the stockade.

κληματίδων καὶ δᾳδὸς —a collective sing. is sometimes thus joined with a plur, as in II. 4.2 λίθοις καὶ κεράμῳ. Cf. Theognis 1360 κληματίνῳ πυρί.

ἀφεῖσαν —see on c. 19.4

περὶ ταῖς ναυσὶν —περὶ with dat. is rare in prose outside Thuc., who uses it often with verbs of fearing.

ἀντεμηχανήσαντό τε . . . καὶ παύσαντες —the co-ordination of an act and its result by τε . . . καὶ is poetical.

σβεστήρια κωλύματα —this collocation is awkward, but Pollux has σβεστηρίοις κωλύμασιν ἐχρῶντο Hw. first thought of σβεστήρια καὶ κω., but rightly rejected it.

παύσαντες . . . τὸ μὴ προσελθεῖν —see on c. 33.3 .

τῆς ἄνω —that related in c. 51. We must remember that ἄνω means on the higher ground away from the Harbour only in a relative sense. See crit. note on c. 2.4. The engagement referred to need not have been, and probably was not, wholly on Epipolae, but, as compared with the fight on the mole and in Lysimeleia, it was ἄνω. See on c. 51.2

ὅθεν —by which.

λαμπρᾶς — cf. II. 7.1 λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν σπονδῶν.

καὶ —the A. army having been defeated already in the nightattack.

μὲν —there is no δὲ to answer this, but the antithesis is obvious.

ἐν παντὶ δὴ ἀθυμίας —??f. on c. 2.4 6

ὁ παράλογος —see Iutr. p. xxxiii. The A. were as much astonished at their own failure as the rest of Greece had been at their undertaking the expedition. Cf. c. 28.3 .

τῆς στρατείας ὁ μ. —regret about the expedition.

ὁμοιοτρόποις —a remarkable tribute to the advanced state of institutions in the Greek cities of Sicily when we remember Pericles' panegyric of Athenian τρόποι.

ναῦς —this consideration had rendered the acquisition of influence in Sicily very important at the beginning of the Pel. war. Sparta made great efforts to obtain a large fleet there.

ἵππους —the Sicilian horses were of proverbial excellence.

μεγέθη —the plur. is often found, though not in Thuc. elsewhere; cf. Herod. II. 10 ; VII. 103.

ἐκ πολιτείας . . . μεταβολῆς —but Alcibiades had urged before the expedition that the cities of Sicily, being populated by motley crowds, ῥᾳδίας ἔχουσι τῶν πολιτειῶν τὰς μεταβολάς, VI. 17.2. It was the invasion that united the various classes sufficiently to prevent revolutions.

τι —Classen makes this adverbial; Stahl makes it object of ἐπενεγκεῖν. Then Classen makes τὸ διάφορον object of ἐπενεγκεῖν; whereas Stahl places comma after μεταβολῆς and makes τὸ δ. object of προσήγοντο. Translate, with Classen's construction, ‘seeing that of the cities which they had attacked these were the only ones then having institutions similar to their own, governed by democracy and possessing fleets and horses and importance, and as they were unable either through a change in their constitution in any respect, or by a greatly superior force to make them feel the difference, by which they might have gained power over them, and as they failed oftener than they succeeded, they had before this been in difficulties, and now that they had been defeated by sea as well—which would never have occurred to them—they were in much greater despair.’

τὸ διάφορον — variously explained as ‘internal discord’ (Heilmann), ‘change of attitude’ (Classen), ‘the opposite party’ (Stahl). But the context is decidedly in favour of ‘the difference between the two sides,’ which in this case the A. had no means of bringing home to the enemy, either by causing a revolution in favour of demoeracy or by coercing them with superior force. For the sense cf. c. 75.7. (If τὸ διάφορον is separated from ἐπενεγκεῖν with Stahl, ἐπενεγκεῖν τι becomes decidedly obscure, nor is its bearing on ἠπόρουν clear. One of the reasons of the ἀπορία was that the A found they could not make the cities see a difference — or balance — in favour of Athens.)

αὐτοῖς —after ἐπενεγκεῖν, though πόλεσι precedes, the inhabitants being substituted for the cities. Stahl takes it with τὸ διάφορον.

ᾧ προσήγοντο ἄν —sc. τὰς πόλεις. Cf the advice of Nicias at the beginning of the expedition τῶν ἄλλων τινα πόλεων προσαγαγέσθαι , VI. 47. (Freeman says ‘the reference must be mainly or wholly to Syracuse.’ There is no ground for this assumption)

ἐκ παρασκευῆς πολλῷ κ —just as ἐκ πολιτείας μεταβολῆς refers to something which the A. had not been able to do, so ἐκ π. πολλῷ κ. refers to something which they had not possessed for, besides being under democracies, the cities had ‘fleets and horses and greatness’ Hence δημοκρατουμέναις corresponds with ἐκ πολιτείας μεταβολῆς, and καὶ ναῦς etc. with ἐκ π πολλῷ κρείσσονος. Thuc. is referring to the whole course of the expedition from the start For the facts alluded to, compare (a) what Hermocrates is made to say before the A. landed—οὐ πλείους τῶν ἐνοικούντων καὶ ἀστυγειτόνων ἔρχονται, πάντα γὰρ ὑπὸ δέους ξυνίσταται, VI 33, (b) what Athenagoras is made to say—ἡγοῦμαι . . . τὴν ἠμετέραν πόλιν αὐτην τῆς νῦν στρατιᾶς . . καὶ εἰ δὶς τοσαύτη ἔλθοι, πολὺ κρείσσω εἶναι, VI. 37, (c) what Thuc. says above in c. 28 of the relative size of Syracuse and Athens.

σφαλλόμενοι δὲ τὰ πλείω —cf. II. 65.12 σφαλέντες ἐν Σικελίᾳ ἄλλῃ παρασκευῇ. He is thinking of the turn which the siege had taken. Cf. I. 69.5.

τά τε πρὸ αὐτῶν —i.e. before the sea-fight,—the sense of αὐτὰ being as often supplied from the context. (The brevity of this passage renders it very obscure. The sense of κρείσσονος and πλείω is, I believe, uncertain. κρείσσονος might mean larger than that brought by Demosthenes and Eurymedon; πλείω might imply ‘since the arrival of Demosth. and Eur.’ The above explanation is only offered as an approximation to the probable meaning.)

μᾶλλον —sc. ἠπόρουν.

ἀδεῶς —even past the A. station. 3

διενοοῦντο κλῄσειν —were resolved that they would close.

περὶ τοῦ . . . σωθῆναι . . . τὴν ἐπιμέλειαν —like ἀγών, κίνδυνος περὶ with noun.

ἐκείνους —again notice this use of ἐκεῖνος. 9

ἀπό τε τῶν παρόντων —in consequence of the present circumstances.

καλὸν σφίσιν κ.τ.λ. —the success would appear to the Greeks glorious to them. There is a metaphor here from the Olympic games. ἐς τοὺς Ἕλληνας is used with φανεῖσθαι just as it is with λέγειν when large bodies are addressed. The Greeks are here spectators of the contest.

ἐλευθεροῦσθαι —the pres. is here used in a vivid sense for the future.

οὐ γὰρ ἔτι —this did not prove to be the case at once. Cf. II. 65.12 ὅμως δέκα ἔτη ἀντεῖχον.

καὶ αὐτοὶ —co-ordinate with τούς τε γὰρ

αὐτῶν —neut., used as in c. 55.2

καὶ ἦν δὲ —cf. II. 36 καὶ πρέπον δὲ ἅμα In this idiom δὲ is the connecting particle, while καὶ emphasises the statement. This is a remark added by Thuc. on his own account.

οὐχὶ Ἀθηναίων —it was not the A. only that they were going to conquer, but many of their allies as well, and not by themselves either, but in company with those who had come to their aid—having taken the lead with . . . and having put forward their city in the struggle to take the post of danger and having made a great advance with the fleet. 23

περιεγίγνοντο —the imperf. of γίγνομαι and its compounds is frequently thus used when something about to happen is anticipated. So with δίδωμι and compounds. Cf. Andoc. I. φονεὺς ἐγιγνόμην τοῦ πατρός=‘I was near becoming my father's murderer.’

τῶν ἄλλων πολλῶν ξυμμάχων —they would be defeating as well their own enemies in Sicily.

οὐδ’ αὐτοὶ αὖ μόνοι —Kruger objects that it would detract from the glory of Syr. to say that they won with the help of others; but Thuc. here states with exactness the nature of the success, and is not concerned either to enhance or to detract from it. Their distinction was (a) to have fought side by side with Corinth and Sparta, ( b) that Syr. had borne the brunt of the struggle, (c) that thus it had been the chief instrument in destroying the A. empire. It was Syracuse, that day the equal yoke-fellow of Cor. and of Sparta, going forth at the head of a crowd of allies, but with Syr. herself the centre and object of the strife, that was called on to strike the blow. Freeman .

ἐμπαρασχόντες —i.e. παρασχόντες ἐν τῷ ἀγῶνι. ἐν in compounds has often an adverbial force; as in II. 44.1 ἐνευδαιμονῆσαι=εὐδαιμονῆσαι ἐν τῷ βίῳ.

προκινδυνεῦσαί τε —the τε, as Herbst rightly says, joins προκόψαντες with ἐμπαρασχόντες, and προκινδυνεῦσαι is in this order because it is an integral part of the phrase.

τοῦ ναυτικοῦ . . . προκόψαντες — having opened the way for the navy, by shewing that the A were not invincible by sea Cf. Eur Hippol. 23, Xen Hipparch. 6, 5.

ἐπὶ —to, whether as friends or as enemies.

<πολεμοῦντος >—without some such word we should have to supply ξυνελθόντος, but the ellipse is very awkward, and, as Stahl says, the sense ad urbem convenire is absurd.

ἐπὶ Σ. καὶ περὶ Σ. —belongs to ἐπολέμησαν, which is ingressive, =‘went to war.’

ἐπὶ Συρακούσαις —Holden retains the MSS. ἐπὶ Συρακούσας, and takes it with ἐλθόντες; but (1) the order is against this; (2) ἐπὶ Συρακούσας then impedes the progress of the sentence, since ἐπὶ Σικελίαν τε καὶ περὶ Σ. is supplied with ἐλθόντες (Herbst agrees with Holden; and he thinks that the form of the sentence is improved).

οὐ κατὰ δίκην κ.τ λ. —joining one another not so much from a sense of right . . ., but rather as circumstances united the several states either through interest or on compulsion.

τι μᾶλλον —often used together, or in the form μᾶλλόν τι. It is stronger than μᾶλλον. μᾶλλον . . . ἀλλὰ for μᾶλλον . . ἢ, only found after a neg., gives greater emphasis to the second elause. 6

κατὰ ξυγγένειαν —it will be seen in § 2 fol. that very few of the allies of either side took their side in the war from this motive.

μετ’ ἀλλήλων στάντες —the usual construction, but ἵστασθαι πρός τινα is also fonnd.

ὡς ἕκαστοι . . . ἔσχον —cf c. 2.1 ὡς εἶχον τάχους.

τῆς ξυντυχίας — ‘circumstances’ which result in decisive action. Here these circumstances are themselves the result of interest or necessity Hence the ‘circumstances’ are feelings that prompt the different states to unite. Cf. I. 33.3. (No doubt this is what Classen meant by rendering ὡς τῆς ξ. ἔσχον as they came mto a closer relationship.)

Ἀθηναῖοι μὲν κ.τ λ. —chiasmus again.

αὐτοῖς —after τῇ αὐτῇ.

ἔτι —with νομίμοις.

Λήμνιοι —the allies of Athens are enumerated thus: (1) Colonists § 2; (2) Euboea § 4; (3) Cylades § 4; (4) Asia Minor §§ 4-6; (5) the islands off north-west coast of Greece § 7; (6) Peloponnesians and μισθοφόροι §§ 8-10; (7) allies in Italy and Sicily § 11. Lemnos and Imbros were secured for Athenian cleruchs by Miltiades, and these two with Scyros were regarded as very peculiarly the possessions of the A. in the north.

οἳ τότε Αἴγιναν εἶχον —i.e. the A. cleruchs placed there in 431 B.C., when the Aeginetans were expelled by A., and settled by Sparta in Thyrea, the border-land between Argolis and Laconia.

Ἑστιαιῆς —taken by A. for cleruchs after the reduction of Euboea by Pericles in 445.

ἄποικοι —i.e. the κληροῦχοι had by now quite supplanted the older population and taken its name, and were regarded as owners, like the possessores.

ξυνεστράτευσαν —ingressive, ‘took the field with them.’

οἱ μὲν ὑπήκοοι —Stahl notes that there are two classes of these perpetual and subject allies, viz. (1) ὑπήκοοι καὶ φόρου ὑποτελεῖς, (2) ὑπἡκοοι οἱ ναυτικὸν παρεχόμενοι or αὐτόνομοι, enjoying their own constitution; viz. Methymna, Chios. These are both distinct from οἱ απὸ ξυμμαχίας αὐτόνομοι, like Corcyra, Zacynthus, Cephallenia.

ὑπηκόων καὶ φόρου ὑ. —subdivided into those from (1) Euboea, (2) νῆσοι = the Cyclades, (3) Ionia. In the latter Chios is included, but Thuc. adds an explanation that it was not ὑποτελής.

Ἐρετριῆς καὶ Χαλκιδῆς —the two most important towns of Euboea; in early times they were rivals. Chalcis is still the capital of the island, but Eretria is now quite insignificant.

νήσων —often used in a restricted sense for the Cyclades. Cf. I. 13.6; III. 104.2.

Κεῖοι — cf. Herod. VIII. 46 Κήιοι ἔθνος ἐὸν Ἰωνικὸν ἀπὸ Ἀθηνέων.

τούτων —asyndeton with demonstr., as Herod. 9.33 with τότε.

τὸ πλεῖστον . . . πάντες — ‘all being Ionians in the main.’ There were some Dryopians among the Styrians, and in the Cyclades there were Carians.

ἀπ’ Ἀθηναίων — there was an unfounded tradition that Chalcis and Eretria were founded by Athens. As for Ionia and the Cyclades, cf. I. 12 Ἴωνας μὲν Ἀθηναῖοι καὶ νησιωτῶν τοὺς τολλοὺς ᾤκισαν.

Καρυστίων — Herod. says that the Dryopians had originally lived in Doris and had been driven out through the early migrations.

ὅμως — with Ἴωνές γε. Though they served under obligation, yet it was natural for them to be on the side of A.

Μηθυμναῖοι —the only Lesbians who retained their autonomy after the revolt of 428. The Aeolians colonised six places in Lesbos.

Αἴνιοι — at the mouth of the Hebrus, colonised by Aeolians from Mytilene.

Βοιωτοῖς — the Aeolian colonisation proceeded from Thessaly and Boeotia.

καὶ ἄντικρυς —though outright. The Plataeans meant are those who escaped at the time of the siege. Athens had given Scione to them for a home.

Ῥόδιοι — Rhodes was a tripolis, and very early acquired great wealth by its trade, and remained rich until debased by Rome.

Κυθήριοι —seized by Nicias in 424. Athens had retained Cythera contrary to the terms of his peace.

τῶν περὶ Πελοπόννησον —regular expression for the N. W. islands. Cf. VI. 85 νησιώτας ὄντας . . . ἐν χωρίοις ἐπικαίροις περὶ τὴν Π.; Isocr. 15. 108 τίς οὐκ οἶδε Κόρκυραν ἐν ἐπικαιροτάτῳ καὶ κάλλιστα κειμένην τῶν περὶ Π.;

Κεφ. μὲν . . . αὐτ. μέν, κατὰ δὲ . . . Κερ. δὲ — the extremes and the means are contrasted, as usually with this double use of μὲν . . . δέ. For the islands see on c. 31.2

κατὰ δὲ τὸ ν. —as islanders.

μᾶλλον —the edd. supply ἢ οἱ ἠπειρῶται, following Aemilius Poitus. It is not easy to detect hereabouts any antithesis between the condition of the islanders and mainlanders. Thuc. means μᾶλλον ἢ ἑκόντες. Freeman says ‘the practical effect of a formally equal alliance between a stronger and a weaker power is well set forth.’ (My explanation of μᾶλλον is strongly supported by οὐχ ἧσσον sc. ἢ ἀνάγκῃ below)

Κορίνθιοι σαφῶς — ‘actually Corinthians.’ In 492 Corcyra had helped Syracuse against Hippocrates of Gela, and once again helped her in the days of Timoleon.

ξυγγενεῖς —Corinth being the mother-city of both.

ἐκ τοῦ εὐπρεπουυ—ς —the obligation under which Corcyra stood to Athens made a πρόφασις εὐπρεπὴς for sinking her obligation to respect her mother-city.

εἵποντο —the simple verb following the compound of l. 44 is idiomatic.

l. 49,

οἱ Μεσσήνιοι νῦν κ. —i e. not the inhabitants of Messenia or of Messana in Sicily, but οἱ ἐκ Ν. καὶ ἐκ Π., those whom we in our day call Messenians. They were descended mostly from οἱ παλαιοὶ Μεσσήνιοι I. 101 f. (Stahl says that Thuc. alludes to the fact that some of them wcrc really helots; but it is more likely that he alludes to their change of home at the end of the third Messenian war and in 425 B.C.)

νῦν —means the time at which he writes. From τότε it looks as if Pylus was then no longer in the hands of the A.: if so this sentence was written after A. lost Pylus in 409 B.C.

Μεγαρέων φυγάδες —expclled in the party struggle of 424 B.C., when Brasidas saved Megara from falling into the hands of A.

Σελινουντίοις —S. was a colony from Hyblaean Megara.

ξυμφορὰν —i.e. their exile. Cf. calamitosus.

ἤδη —from this point, as in II. 96.3.

Ἀργεῖοι —the alliance with A. had been renewed in June 417 B.C.

ἔχθρας — Argos, long the rival of Sparta, had been humbled by her in 495 B.C.

τῆς παραυτίκα ἕκαστοι ἰδίας ὠ. —generally understood to mean that they were mercenaries; but the plur ἕκαστοι is against this. Possibly Haacke rightly refers to Spartan and anti-Spartan factions in Argos.

Ἀρκάδων — already heard of as mercenaries in the Persian wars. Herod. VIII. 26 .

αἰεὶ —at any time.

οὐδὲν ἧσσον —i.e. though they belonged to the same race

Κρησὶ . . . ξυγκτίσαντας —the same change as in c. 40.4 al

μετὰ μισθοῦ ἐλθεῖν —cf. Isoc. 17. 46 μετὰ ποίας ἂν ἐλπίδος ἦλθον ἐπὶ τοῦτον;

Δημοσθένους —objective. They remembered the victory which they had won in 426 under his lead. See on c. 16.1 l. 12.

εὐνοίᾳ —most of the Acarnamans had been allies of A. since 430. See on c. 31.2

κόλπῳ —is sometimes omitted with ὁ Ἰόνιος.

Θούριοι καὶ Μ. —see c. 33.5.

ἐν τοιαύταις κ.τ.λ. —who, when the Athenians came, had been reduced to such straits by a rcvolution. With ἐν ἀνάγκαις cf. ἀνάγκαις ταῖσδ’ ἐνέζευγμαι Aesch. PB 109 . τοιαύταις means such as induced them to join the A. τότε refers to c. 33.5, where we found that Thurii had to be persuaded, while Metapontum in addition had passed through a crisis ( καιροί). Now we find that Thurii also had suffered in the same way. (τοιαύταις was first explained thus by Bauer. It is obscure. Did Thuc. write ταῖς αὐταῖς; or did he mean by τοιαύταις that the στασιωτικοἰ καιροὶ of Thurii ‘were such as I have described in the case of Metapontum’?)

κατειλημμένοι — depreliensi, sc. ὑπὸ τῶν Ἀθηναίων .

Νάξιοι καὶ Κ. —c. 14.2 .

Ἐγεσταῖοι —Segesta, as its coins and the Romans call it, was chief city of the Elymians, who were thought to be Trojans. It was perpetually at war with Selinus. Life was difficult in the W. corner of Sicily owing to the constant rivalry of the Carthaginians and the Greeks there. In 409 Segesta joined Carthage in an attack on Selinus which destroyed for ever the greatness of that city.

οἵπερ ἐπηγάγοντο —it is indicative of the falling off of high sentiment at Athens that she had consented to aid the barbarian against a Greek town.

Σικελῶν τὸ πλέον —it is easy to see why the majority of the Sicels joined A. They did so early in the campaign of 414, about June, when the 2nd Syracusan counter-wall had failed to check the A. circumvallation and the besieging fleet had command of the Great Harbour, when Syr. was in terror and peace was being discussed there. See also on c. 1.4. The Sicels hoped to use Athens as a means for diminishing Greek influence in Sicily, and ever since A. had first interfered in Sicily, they had shown a strong tendency to support her.

Τυρσηνῶν —cf. c. 53.2.

τοσάδε . . . ἔθνη —it must have been very hard to get all these different elements to work with a common will.

Καμαριναῖοι —see on c. 33.1, as also for Γελῷοι .

Ἀκραγαντίνων —Girgenti, ‘the fairest of mortal cities’ (Pind. Pyth. XII. 1), remained neutral throughout. Cf. on c. 32.1. The life of Empedocles of Acragas, 484-424, about covers the greatest period in the history of Sicilian art.

ἐν τῷ ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνα = μετ’ αὐτοὺς above.

οἵδε μὲν —here ὅδε refers to what precedes. This is very rare in prose except in Herod. and Thuc. Cf. c. 58.2. So with τοσόσδε in c. 57.11; 58.3 ; 59.1; 78.1 .

Ἱμεραῖοι —see on c. 1.1

μόνοι —i e. they are the only Greeks there.

οἰκοῦσιν —used elsewhere in proximity to νέμεσθαι. These small things show how ancient authors, like modern ones, unconsciously have their mannerisms.

ἔθνη — of small communities, but referring to difference of origin.

Σικελοὶ μόνοι —no Elymians, Sicans, or Phoenicians joined Syr.

νεοδαμώδεις — see on c. 19.3. With the helots they numbered 600 hoplites; Eceritus, a Spartan, had been sent in command of them, but he must have returned.

μόνοι —the C. alone sent both ships and infantry. The Leucadians and Ambraciots sent ships only.

Λευκάδιοι καὶ Ἀ. —were allies of Sparta. Corinth was their mother-city.

ἀναγκαστοὶ —see on c. 19.4 l. 33, and Index s.v.

πρὸς —in comparison with.

μεγάλας —not that they were greater than Corinth and Sparta, but because their cities were large they needed less support from outside.

ἄλλος ὅμιλος —light-armed troops ὅμιλος is confined to poetry, Herod., Thuc., and late authors. Thuc. uses it often.

οὐκέτι οὐδὲν κ.τ.λ. —the object of this emphatic statement is to show that now the deciding struggle—the ἀγὼν μέγιστος—was at hand.

δ’ οὖν —resumes from c. 56.

καλὸν ἀγώνισμα . . . εἶναι —cf. c. 56.2; 86.

ἐπὶ —as a consequence of.

ἑλεῖν τε τὸ ς. —to capture the whole of that vast army, στρατόπεδον being the besicging force wherever it was stationed.

μηδὲ καθ’ ἕτερα = κατὰ μηδέτερα.

l 10.

ἔκλῃον — apparently they left a narrow opening (διέκπλους) which was guarded by chains.

ἢν —in case, like εἴ πως, εἰ ἄρα.

ὀλίγον οὐδὲν κ.τ λ. —cf. II. 8 ὀλίγον ἐπενόουν οὐδὲν ἀμφότεροι ; Aristoph. Eq. 387 μηδὲν ὀλίγον ποίει. νῦν γὰρ ἔχεται μέσος; Plut. Demetr. 43 μικρὸν οὐδὲν ἔτι ἐφρόνουν.

τὴν ἄλλην διάνοιαν —their ulterior purpose.

βουλευτέα —the plur. of the verbal replacing the sing. is esp. common in Thuc.

ταξίαρχοι —not usually present at the council. 6

ἐκπλευσόμενοι —i.e. before the eclipse.

ἔμελλον —here introduces Oratio Obliqua.

τὰ ἄνω —Epipolae was to be abandoned There is nothing to show that they had quitted it before this, as Arnold thought.

διατειχίσματι —by fencing round a space at the end of the double wall. 14

τοῦ ἄλλου —those who were not needed to guard the narrow space.

ἀντιλήψεσθαι —gain; the word implies secure possession. So with ἀντίληψις, seizure, grip, objection.

ὼς . . . καὶ —see on c. 43.1.

καὶ ὁπωσοῦν —with ἐπιτήδειος.

ἡλικίας μετέχων —i.e. not altogether ἐν τῷ ἀχρείῳ τῆς ἡλικίας (II. 44.4), and so fit for military service. This must mean that non-combatants were to be used, for none of the regular troops could have been otherwise than ἡ. μετέχων.

ἐπιτήδειος —opposite of ἀχρεῖος or ἄχρηστος, in a military sense.

καὶ —and so.

ἐξ ἀναγκαίου —in desperate straits; best taken alone as an adverbial phrase. (Some edd. make ἀν. fem. agreeing with διανοίας, but τοιαυτης is then very awkward.) Adverbial phrases with ἐκ are very common.

τοιαύτης —sc. ἐκ , from the nature of their plan, i.e. considering the difficulties that it involved.

κρατηθῆναι —alluding to cc. 52-3.

ἄλλων —see c. 4.3 .

ὁ μὲν ἀγὼν —in the coming struggle every one of us will be fighting for country and for life just as much as the enemy. If we win this battle at sea, every individual may see again his own home, wherever it may be. There is a different nuance in πατρίδος as applied to the A. and the Syr. For the use of τῳ cf. Eur. Heraclid. 826 καὶ τῇ τεκούσῃ νῦν τιν’ ἀρκέσαι χρεών.

ἀθυμεῖν δὲ κ.τ.λ. —but we must not despair, nor must we allow ourselves to feel like raw recruits, for whom a defeat in their first battle fills all the future with foreboding of similar misfortunes. τὴν ἐλπίδα is defined by τοῦ φόβου as ‘an expectation that falls in the sphere of fear.’ Cf. Plat. Laws 644C κοινὸν μὲν ὄνομα ἐλπίς, ἴδιον δὲ φόβος μὲν ἡ πρὸ λύπης ἐλπίς. θάρρος δὲ ἡ πρὸ τοῦ ἐναντίου. ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς means the reverses they have met with.

ἀλλ’ ὅσοι τε —no; all of you who are A., with the experience of many wars, all of you who are allies, our constant companions in arms, remember how calculation is baffied in war, and, in hopes that fortune may yet be with us, and resolved, as you see your army before you, to renew the struggle in a manner worthy of your numbers, prepare.

πάρεστε —occasionally the 3rd person is found in such rel. clauses; e.g. Andoc. 1, 46 ὁπόσοι ὑμῶν παρῆσαν, ἀναμιμνήσκεσθε; Lys. 12.97. So in Latin poets, as Ovid Trist. 3.4.75 et qua quisque potest aliqua mala nostra levate. See also on c. 64.2.

τῶν ἐν τοῖς πολέμοις παραλόγων —Thuc. insists on the uncertainty, the inconsequence, of war so often because he regards history, under normal conditions, as effect following ascertainable causes. He introduced into history the notion of law.

τὸ τῆς τύχης — denoting a power acting by some inscrutable method. Cf. Eur. Alc. 785 τὸ τῆς τύχης ἀφανὲς οἷ προβήσεται, τὰ τῆς τύχης are the manifestations of this power.

κἂν μεθ’ ἡμῶν . . . στῆναι —cf. c. 77.3 ἱκανὰ γὰρ τοῖς πολεμίοις ηὐτύχηται. Other statements by Nicias of a like nature, showing how firmly he believed in the distribution during life of rewards and punishments, are found in v. 16.1 ; VI. 11.6; 23.3. It is the idea that meets us in Aeschylus and Herodotus.

ἀναμαχούμενοι —generally with an accus., as Plato Hip. Maj. 286D ἰέναι πάλιν ἐπὶ τὸν ἐρωτήσαντα, ἀναμαχούμενος τὸν λόγον.

ὑμῶν αὐτῶν —attracted into the rel. clause, like ἕκαστος.

Ἃ δὲ ἀρωγὰ κ.τ.λ. —we on our side have dis cussed with the pilots and have provided all the means in our power which we found would help us in the narrow space of the harbour against the difficulties that gave us trouble before, namely the crowding of the vessels and the enemy's men on deck.

ἐπὶ —describes the circumstances, as in II. 17 προῄδει μὴ ἐπ’ ἀγαθῷ ποτε αὐτὸ κατοικισθησόμενον.

παρασκευὴν —force. For the fact see c. 40.5.

οἷς —neut., referring to ὄχλος and παρασκευή.

ἐκ τῶν παρόντων —cf. c. 77.1.

καὶ γὰρ τοξόται κ.τ.λ. —there will be many archers and javelin men on board and very many whom in a battle out at sea we should not have thought of using, since the overweighting of the ships would impede our skill; but here being forced to fight a land battle aboard ship, we shall find the plan convenient.

διὰ τὸ βλάπτειν ἂν —frequent use. of the infin. with art. is a mark of the speeches and the higher style.

πρόσφορα —the rel. ᾦ is lost sight of. Cf. Herod. 9.33 τῇ τε ἐπιμαχώτατον ἦν . . . καὶ πρόσοδος μάλιστα ταύτῃ ἐγίνετο. For the plur. cf. c. 43.2.

ηὕρηται δ’ ἡμῖν κ.τ.λ. —we have worked out all the plans needed on our side in the construction of our vessels, and to meet the thick beams on the enemy's prows which gave us most trouble, we have arranged iron grapnels, which when thrown at them will prevent any ship that has struck us from backing, if the marines work well afterwards. ηὕρηται ὴμῖν, like ἡτοίμασται above, is another example of the preference for the impers. pass. in Gk.

παχύτητας —the plur. of the abstract used distributively, as also ἐπιβολαί. ᾧπερ is like ἐν ᾧ referring to a preceding clause.

τῆς προσπεσούσης —ἑκάστης π.; cf. c. 65.2 τῆς νεώς.

τὰ ἐπὶ τούτοις —what follows, i.e. boarding the ships. Cf. Aristoph. Eccles. 82 τἀπὶ τούτοις δράσομεν .

ἐς τοῦτο γὰρ κ τ λ. —in fact we have, as I said, been forced into fighting. For ἐς τοῦτο . . . ὥστε cf. c. 48.3 .

ὅσον ἂν . . . ἐπέχῃ — ‘so much as our troops will occupy.’

ὧν χρὴ κ.τ.λ. —Bear this in mind, and fight to the end with all your strength; and do not be driven ashore. but when two ships strike, do not let them drive you off until you have cleared the heavy troops from the enemy's deck.

πρότερον . . . ἢ . . . ἀπαράξητε —πρότερον . . . ἢ occasionally stands for πρότερον . . . πρὶν with subj., indic. or infin. in Herod. and Thuc., but very rarely in other authors, as Dem. 31.12 (early speech) πρότερον τοὺς ὅρους ἔστησεν ἢ ἐκεῖνον τὴν δίκην ὀφλεῖν. The subj. without ἂν in temporal sentences—after πρὶν, πρὶν ἢ, μέχρι—is also a mark of early prose.

ἀπαράξητε —cf. c. 6.3

καὶ ταῦτα κ τ.λ. —I am now addressing not so much the sailors as the soldiers, as it is on the men on deck that this duty mainly falls: and at present we have still the advantage of them in most points with our infantry. The last clause betrays the speaker's want of confidence.

τοῖς δὲ ναύταις —Sailors, I urge, nay more, I entreat you, not to be in any way too overcome by your misfortunes; you have now better arrangements above, and a greater number of ships. Think, I beg you, how well worth preserving is the pleasant feeling that, being thought Athenians so long even if you are not so, by your knowledge of our language and your imitation of our institutions you were admired in Greece, and—as far as advantages go—had as great a share as we in our empire, while, in the matter of respect from onr subjects and immunity from wrong, you had much more than we. This § appears to start with the 3rd pers., which is changed for the 2nd in ἐθαυμάζεσθε (l. 18); but the Gk. orators habitually mingle statements about people with direct address to them in this way.

τῷδε —i.e. ἐν τῷ περαινεῖν.

τὴν ἡδονὴν —the pleasure which he describes in the rel. clause following.

οἳ —the antecedent, ὑμῖν, is omitted. The sentence ἀξία ἐστὶν ἡ ἡδονὴ διασώσασθαι οἳ . . . ἐθαυμάζεσθε is constructed like τὸ δ’ εὐτυχές, οἳ ἂν . . . λάχωσιν in II. 44.1.

Ἀθηναῖοι νομιζόμενοι — he means the ξένοι and μέτοικοι serving as ναῦται; at the same time he lays stress on the influence of the Athenian ὄχλος ναυτικός. So in [Xen.] Ath. Pol. 2 οἱ κυβερνῆται καὶ οἱ κελευσταὶ καὶ . . . οἱ πρῳρᾶται καὶ οἱ ναυπηγοί, οὗτοί εἰσιν οἱ τὴν δύναμιν περιτιθέντες τῇ πόλει πολὺ μᾶλλον ἢ οἱ ὁπλῖται καὶ οἱ γενναῖοι καὶ οἱ χρηστοί. There was promotion from the lowest position as a rower to the highest as κυβερνήτης. There would be few true-born Athenians amongst the ναῦται now owing to the disasters in Sicily. Prob. many θῆτες, who ordinarily served as sailois, were employed as hoplites. 18,

τῇ ἐπιστήμῃ —causal with θαυμάζω, as IV. 85.3, with φοβοῦμαι II. 89.6.

τῶν τρόπων —the private habits as contrasted with the πολιτεία, the public institutions, of Athens. The A. prided themselves both on their πολιτεία and on their τρόποι .

ἐθαυμάζεσθε κατὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα —Thuc., owing to his own exile and his travels, would have good reason to know the fact and to appreciate the value of the ἡδονή.

ἔς τε τὸ φοβερὸν τοι—ς ὑπηκόοις —some of the μετοικοι whom N. is supposed to be addressing must have been by origin υπήκοοι, so that Thuc. prob. means that those of them who had served in the A. fleet were regarded with awe in their own cities. φοβερὸν=‘causing fear’; cf. on c. 42.3.

πολὺ πλεῖον —chiasmns with οὐκ ἔλασσον. This passage, besides containing an exaggeration (see crit. note), seems rather lacking both in taste and in tact, even when we remember that most of the doubtful supporters of A. had deserted. But it must be remembered that none of the speeches in Thuc., and least of all the military harangues, could possibly have been delivered. Sce Appendix I.

ὥστε κοινωνοὶ κ.τ.λ. —with you alone we freely share our empire; it is but just that you should not betray it now; rather, filled with scorn of the Corinthians whom you have often defeated and of the Sicilian Greeks, not one of whom even dared to face us so long as our fleet was at its best, repel them, and show that in spite of sickness and disaster your science is superior to another's confidence while succeeding.

ἐλευθέρως —always understood to mean while retaining your freedom and compared with VI. 85.2 ἐλευθέρως ξυμμαχοῦντες. It implies this too; but it is meant as an allusion to the generous spirit in which A had treated them. Cf. II. 37.2 ἐλευθέρως τὰ πρὸς τὸ κοινὸν πολιτεύομεν.

καταφρονήσαντες —paronomasia with preceding word. The aor. is ingressive.

ἤκμαζε τὸ ναυτικὸν —the decline of the naval power of Athens meant the decline of her empire over the imagination of Greece. 30

ἑτέρας —for ἑτέρων, but preferred so as to correspond with ὑμετέρα.

εὐτυχούσης — contrasted with καὶ μετ’ ἀσθενείας καὶ ξ. Observe this very common use of μετὰ with abstract nouns.

τούς τε Ἀ. κ.τ.λ. —Those of you who are A. I once again remind that you have at home no ships in the docks like these, no men fit for service, and that in the event of any other issue than victory, your enemies here will immediately sail thither, and our friends who are left there will not be strong enough to repel our enemies on the spot together with the invaders. And so, while you will immediately be at the mercy of Syr.—and you know yourselves the purpose you had in attacking them—your countrymen will be at the mercy of Sparta.

οὔτε ναῦς —at the beginning of the Pel. war, the A. had 300 ships ready, and shortly afterwards a reserve fleet of 100 ships was created. The normal strength of the fleet during the war was over 300.

ἡλικίαν —conerete, like νεότης, and juventus. The abstract term represents the young men as a power in the state.

τι ἄλλο ἢ τὸ κρατεῖν —Euphemism in alluding to defeat is very common, and Gk. authors habitually avoid close reference to the scene of a disaster.

ἐπ’ ἐκεῖνα —alluding, like ἐκεῖ, to Athens; both words were often so used by persons abroad.

Ὥστε κ.τ.λ. — ‘Therefore, in this one struggle having to defend both yourselves and them, stand firm now, if ever, and reflect each and all that you who are now to embark are also to the Athenians infantry and ships and all that remains of the state, and the great name of Athens. In defence of these, if any man excel in skill or courage, let him show them now; he could not find a better chance to display them for his own henefit and for the safety of all.’ In this epilogue the end proposed by the speaker (τὸ τέλος Arist. Rhet. B. 19, 26; τελικὸν κεφάλαιον Hermogenes calls it) is τὸ συμφέρον, having before been τὸ καλόν. These two topics (τόποι) are extremely common in military harangnes.

ὑπὲρ ἀμφοτέρων —alluding to οἱ μὲν in l. 9 and οἱ δ’ in

καθεστῶτες — with ἐν as in Herod. VII. 139, but far commoner with ἐς. Cf. παρεστάναι ἐν τῇ γνώμῃ Andoc. II. 24.

καθ’ ἑκάστους τε καὶ ξ. —the mass is to act as a whole, and yet each individual is to feel that the safety of the mass rests with him. It is again brought out below in αὐτός τε αὑτῷ . . . καὶ τοῖς ξύμπασι.

ὑμῶν . . . εἰσὶ —with ‘partitive’ gen. 1st or 2nd person, the verb is generally in the 3rd pers.

καὶ νῆες —the statement οἱ ἐν ταῖς ναυσὶ νῆες εἰσί is not very sane. Apparently Thuc. has in mind that the ships which are to take part and which cannot be replaced will not manœuvre—ἠν αγκάσμεθα πεζομαχεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν νεῶν—so that the A. would be depending much less than usual on their ships and much more on their men. A ship when manned was to the Gks. a living thing. Here the ships will be manned, and yet will be inert. Before condemning the words right out we must notice the train of thought that has led Thuc. to write them. (The speech from c. 63.3 to the end is not a good example of composition. Sce Appendix I.)

τὸ μέγα ὄνομα —Isocr. 6.110 μὴ καταισχυνθῆναι τὸ τῆς Σπάρτης ὄνομα. 18

περὶ ῶν —prob. neuter, applying to πεζοὶ καὶ νῆες, etc.

προφέρει = προέχει, but used so only by Herod., Thuc., and poets.

παρῆν μὲν κ.τ λ. —as they saw the arrangements actually being made, could see that the A intended to fight.

ἡ ἐπιβολὴ —the device for flinging.

ὡς ἕκαστα —this use of ὲκατερος and ἕκαστος with ὡς and without a verb, after appearing in Herod. and Thuc., first reappears in Aristotle.

ἐπὶ πολὺ —as often, this replaces an accus. of the object.

ὅπως ἂν ἀπολισθάνοι —ὅπως ἃν appears with opt. in final clauses in Homer, Herod., only here in Thuc., and four times in Xen, and in Aesch. Ag. 364.

Ὅτι μὲν καλὰ κ.τ.λ. —That our past exploits have been glorious, that it is a glorious future for which we are about to fight, most of you, we think, know: otherwise you would not have devoted yonrselves with such enthusiasm to your task. But if any man has not so clear a perception of this as he should have, we will make it plain. αὐτῶν = τῶν προειργασμένων καὶ τῶν μελλόντων.

Ἀθηναίους γὰρ κ.τ.λ. —the A., who came to this country intending first to enslave S. and then, if they succeeded, the Pel. as well and the rest of Greece—the A. who possess an empire at present the largest of all that belong or ever have belonged to Greeks, you, the first to withstand their navy that gave them all their power, have already defeated in several battles by sea and are probably going to defeat again now. Observe the construction of this admirable sentence, and esp. the order.

ἔπειτ’ —as καὶ follows, we should perhaps read ἔπειτα δέ with B, since ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ is the regular formula.

τῷ ναυτικῷ —for the dat. after ὑφίστασθαι see L. and S. This is the only instance in Thuc, since in II. 61.4, which edd. compare, ξυμφορὰς τὰς μεγίστας ὑφίστασθαι is the true) reading.

ἄνδρες γὰρ κ.τ.λ. —for when men are humbled in that wherein they claim to excel, what remains of their selfrespect is more thoroughly weakened than if they had not thought to excel (sc. προύχειν) from the first, and while receiving a check from the unexpected outcome of their boast, they give way even more than their real strength necessitates. This we may suppose to be the case with the A. now

αὐτὸ ἑαυτοῦ —a rhetorical device for exhibiting the change in the condition of a thing, which none the less retains its identity.

τῷ παρ’ ἐλπίδα τοῦ αὐχήματος —if taken together, with Classen and Bolime, this balances παρὰ ἰσχὺν τῆς δυνάμεως better than if τοῦ αὐχήματος is put with σφαλλόμενοι, and τῷ παρ’ ἐλπίδα (= unexpectedly) taken alone, with Bloomfield, Arnold, and Stahl. See Appendix II.

ὃ νῦν —the speaker shows that while they themselves might well anticipate victory, their enemies will look forward to nothing but defeat, and consequently will fail to exert the power which they have. Bloomfield.

ἡμῶν δὲ κ.τ.λ. —with us the spirit which we had before, in which while still inexperienced we made a desperate venture, is now snrer, and as we have added to it a conviction that we must be the strongest if we have defeated the strongest, every man's hope is doubled; and as a rule, in any enterprise, the greater a man's hope the greater is his readiness. ἡμῶν τὸ ὑπάρχον is our natural spirit, ὑπάρχω being habitually used of a nation's qualities and mental characteristics. ἡμῶν is emphatic.

δοκήσεως —this word is found only in Herod. and Thuc. among prose authors.

τοῦ κρατίστους εἶναι —here, as in c. 36.5 and VIII 87, the MSS. give τό, but it is unlikely that Thuc. alone, and in these three places only, should have put the accus. to explain a gen. or dat. See Appendix II. κρατίστους . . . κρατίστους is traductio.

Τά τε τῆς κ.τ.λ. —The counterfeits of our method which they have devised are customary in our mode of fighting, and we shall be prepared for every one of them. But they will have a number of heavy infantry on deck contrary to custom, and a number of javelin men from Acarnania and elsewhere, mere landsmen aboard ship for the most part, who will not even find out how to discharge their javelins in a sitting position. Must they not endanger the ships and be thrown into utter confusion when they do not move in their usual manner?

τὸ καθεστηκὸς —the ‘established custom’ of all navies.

χερσαῖοι, ὡς εἰπεῖν —most commentators since Bauer say that ὡς εἰπεῖν so to speak is added because χερσαῖος is used esp. of animals. This is very improbable: elsewhere in Thuc. ὡς εἰπεῖν qualifies an universal statement, as II. 51 ; III. 38, c. 39.82; VI. 30 ; VIII. 5, 96. There is no passage in which it is certainly used in any other sense; nor is it clear that χερσαῖος necessarily suggests animals.

καθεζομένους —prob. literal, and not merely ‘cramped’ as Goller thought.

ταράξονται —see on c. 36.6. So ὠφελήσομαι is often used in pass. sense.

ἐπεὶ καὶ κ.τ.λ. —for the number of their ships will be no advantage to them, in case any of you are alarmed about your numerical inferiority in the coming battle. In a small space many will be slower in accomplishing their object, and completely exposed to injury from our devices.

πλήθει —often used of superior numbers.

ἐς τὸ βλάπτεσθαι —the construction, as Classen says, is influenced by ἐς τὸ δρᾶν. Elsewhere ῥᾴδιος takes plain infin. Cf. II. 11.5 πρός τε τὸ ἐπιέναι εὐψυχότατοι, πρός τε τὸ ἐπιχειρεῖσθαι ἀσφαλέστατοι.

ἀφ’ ὧν —for ἀπ’ ἐκείνων ἃ—i.e. the nom. of the rel. is attracted. This is very unusual, and this is the only instance in Thuc.

τὸ δ’ ἀληθέστατον κ.τ.λ. —assure yourselves of a plain fact from information which we think to be clear: it is because their distress is overpowering and because they are forced by their present misery that they are reduced to the desperate expedient of risking a battle as best they can, trusting more to fortune than to orderly preparation. Their purpose is either to force their way out by sea or to retreat by land after the battle; for they know that their plight could not possibly be worse than it is.

βιαζόμενοι ὑπὸ —see on c. 13

παρασκευῆς . . . τύχης —the same antithcsis in IV. 55. So γνώμη and τύχη are very often contrasted. Thuc. thinks of Nicias. But παρασκευὴ is not ‘actual force’ here, as Bloomfield and Arnold say, but it is τὸ παρεσκευάσθαι, the opposite of ἀταξία in c. 68.1.

Πρὸς οὖν ἀταξίαν κ.τ.λ. —Therefore against such disorderly and such bitter enemies whose fortune has already submitted, let us advance with eagerness, and let us think that men act lawfully towards an enemy, when purposing to retaliate upon the aggressor they determine to satisfy their heart's animosity, and also that we shall have the delight of repelling our foes, and that this is proverbially most pleasant.

ἀταξίαν . . . καὶ τύχην —referring back to παρασκευῆς and τύχης .

νομιμώτατον εἶναι . . . οἳ ἂν —this kind of combination is idiomatic and oecurs throughout Attic. Cf. on c. 63.3 From the analogy of other constructions in Gk., and from a comparison of the instances, it is more likely that the idiom is based on a brachylogy than on a combination of two constructions. Cf. Xen. Hel. II. 3.51 νομίζω προστάτου ἔργον εἶναι οἵου δεῖ, ὃς ἂν . . . μὴ ἐπιτρέπη?.

ὡς ἐπὶ τιμωρίᾳ —ἐπὶ and a noun frequently take the place of a final clause.

δικαιώσωσιν —an Ionic and old Attic word.

ἀποπλῆσαι — explere, as τὴν φιλονικίαν ἐκπιμπλάναι III. 82.8.

τῆς γνώμης τὸ θυμούμενον —cf. I. 90 τὸ βουλόμενον τῆς γνώμης ; 2.59 τὸ ὀργιζόμενον τῆς γ. ; III. 10.1 τὸ διαλάσσον τῆς γ. ; V. 9 τὸ ἀνειμένον τῆς γ. For τὸ θυμούμενον wrath cf. Eur. Hec. 299 .

ἐκγενησόμενον —the partic. depends on νομίσωμεν, in spite of the infin. δίκαιον εἶναι (and ἥδιστον εἶναι). But then with the partic. νομίσωμεν = εἰδῶμεν.

καί . . . ἥδιστον εἶναι —sc. τὸ ἐχθροὺς ἀμύνασθαι. They are to think that their conduct (1) νομιμώτατον εἶναι—is in accordance with custom and right, (2) ἥδιστον εἶναι—is in accordance with the proverb that expresses that custom. (I am unable to accept the interpretation hitherto given of this passage. See crit. note.)

τὸ λεγόμενόν που —this is in accordance with the ancient love of revenge; but Thuc., like Euripides, had reason to know that there was something better. Cf. Eur. Ba. 877 τί τὸ κάλλιον | παρὰ θεῶν γέρας ἐν βροτοῖς | ἢ χεῖρ’ ὑπὲρ κορυφᾶς | τῶν ἐχθρῶν κατέχειν ; For the proverb cf. Juv. 13.180 at vindicta bonum vita jucundius ipsa, where Mayor refers to Iliad 18.108.

ὡς δὲ ἐχθροὶ κ τ.λ. —that they are our enemies, nay our bitterest enemies, you all know: for they invaded our land to make us slaves; and had they succeeded in that, they would have inflicted on our men the worst penalty (i e. death), on onr wives and children the worst indignities (i.e. slavery), on the whole city the most disgraceful reproach (i.e. dependence).

ἀνθ’ ὧν μὴ κ.τ.λ. —wherefore no man should feel for them. nor think it gain that they should depart without danger to us. That is all they will do even if they win the battle; but the prize—to punish them when we have gained our desire, as we probably shall do, and to confirm for the whole of Sicily the liberty which she already enjoyed—is a glorious one. How few ventures there are in which the loss in case of failure is as small as the gain through success is great.

τινα —cf. c. 61.1 .

ἀκινδύνως —certainly not ‘without doing us further harm’ (Holden); which would involve a paradox that would scarcely be convincing to men who had suffered so much; but ‘without our having to run (a further) risk,’ as is shown by ἀγών and, above all, by κινδύνων below.

πραξάντων —sc. ἡμῶν. Beside εὖ (κακῶς, etc.) ποιεῖν, πράττειν, neut. plur. adj. are regularly used with ποιεῖν, πράττειν.

ἃ βουλόμεθα —sc. πρᾶξαι, not, as Kruger, the fate which we wish for them, but for ourselves. Victory is meant.

καὶ τῇ πάσῃ Σ. —Confirmed the charters that were yours before:— | No parleying now! In Britain is one breath Wordsworth, To the Men of Kent.

βεβαιοτέραν παραδοῦναι —the language is taken from the tenure of property. καρποῦσθαι is in contrast with the βεβαιοτέρα κτῆσις which is to be bestowed ( παραδοῦναι) on them. The subject changes at παραδοῦναι.

καλὸς ὁ ἀγών —notice that ὁ ἀγών is in apposition with τὸ . . . κολασθῆναι . . . καὶ παραδοῦναι, for this is the right way of taking the words, instead of making τὸ κολασθῆναι καἱ παραδοῦναι subject and ὁ ἀγών part of the pred., as the edd say.

κινδύνων κ.τ.λ. —the speech ends with a γνώμη, or general truth, a form of close of which Thuc. is very fond. Cf. c. 77 end.

σπανιώτατοι —again we have the accumulation of superlatives noticed at c. 42.3

σφαλῆναι βλάπτοντες —σφαλλω and βλάπτω are often near neighbours.

καὶ οἱ μὲν —the description of the last battle has been much admired both in ancient and in modern times. Dionysius Hal. quotes much of it and praises it warmly; it is also commended by Lucian, and by Gibbon, Gray, Macaulay.

ᾐσθάνοντο —sc. πληροῦντας τὰς ναῦς.

ὅπερ πάσχουσιν —sc. οἱ ἄνθρωποι, which is very often omitted thus; e.g. Plat. Crat. 387C ὀνομάζοντες γάρ που λέγουσι τοὺς λόγους.

σφίσιν —i.e. Nicias and his men.

αὐτοῖς —prob.=to them, i.e. τοῖς στρατιώταις: but Classen takes it to mean by them, i.e. τοῖς στρατηγοῖς.

ἀνεκάλει —called by name, )( ἀποκαλεῖν.

πατρόθεν τε ἐπονομάζων —mentioning the father's name as well (ἐπ‐). Cf. Aristot. Ath. Pol. 21.4 ταύτας ἐπονομόσας τριττῦς.

αὐτοὺς ὀνομαστὶ —does not add any fresh information, but heightens the impressiveness of the description.

φυλήν —men were officially addressed by the name of their deme; but here the tribe is chosen because of its military character.

τό τε καθ’ ἑαυτόν κ.τ.λ. —admonishing those who had any reputation of their own not to be false to it. τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτόν is taken as object of προδιδόναι, and the schol. explains it as τὴν οἰκείαν ἀρετήν; but elsewhere in Thuc. τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν means either (1) in person, used adverbially, as in Dem. 21.140 τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτὸν ὅπως δύναται , Aristoph. Eq. 513 χορὸν αἰτοίη καθ’ ἑαυτόν, or (2) his own division; and it may well be used in the former sense here. But it should be connected with what follows, in the sense ᾧ ὑπῆρχε λαμπρότητός τι τὸ καθ’ ἑαυτόν, the order being modified for the sake of the antithesis with τὰς π. ἀρετάς.

οἱ πρόγονοι —observe the sentiment in which the last appeal of Nicias is grounded. Thuc knew well that the reverence felt by his countrymen for the past was excessive; cf. l. 22 below. Pericles also certainly discouraged this excess and tried to direct the A. to the future. But Thuc. is right in making N. lay stress on the glory of the past here, and no doubt N. really did so. ἀρετὰς is deeds of valour as usual.

ἀφανίζειν —contrasted with ἐπιφανεῖς.

πατρίδος τῆς ἐλευθερωτάτης —the order puts emphasis on the adj., and the statement is true of Athens itself; but she had unduly neglected the claims of her subjects and thus enabled Sparta to raise the cry of ἐλευθερία by which a great part of Greece was deluded.

ὑπομιμνῄσκων —this word is often used when people are reminded of something dear to them and absent, for which they fecl a longing (πόθος).

τῆς ἐν αὐτῇ κ.τ.λ. = ὅτι ἑκάστῳ ἐν αὐτῇ ἀνεπιτάκτως διαιτᾶσθαι ἔξεστι.’ Classen. ‘It is noteworthy that this special feature of the great democracy should be the one picked out at such an hour as this as the thing which had gone further than anything to endear Athens to her children. Freeman . Pericles in the Funeral Oration says ‘In our daily intercourse we are as tolerant as in our public life . . . we are not angry with our neighbour for doing as he pleases.’ II. 37.2 .

ἄλλα τε —τε joins λέγων to the preceding words.

τοῦ καιροῦ —cf. c. 2

οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν κ.τ.λ. —all that men would say, not guarding against seeming to talk commonplaces, and urging what does duty on all occasions (ὑπὲρ ἁπάντων) to the same effect about wives and children and ancestral gods; still because they think it to be useful, they appeal to it.

καὶ ὑπὲρ —with this καὶ supply εἴποιεν ἄν, but not ὅσα, since the influence of the relative is as usual lost in the second member of the sentence; and so Thuc eeases to tell us directly what Nicias said, and instead tells us what men always say under such circumstances. And so ἐπιβοῶνται (see note below) is added at the end. (Hitherto there have been two explanations of this καί: (1) Goller, followed by most modern edd., takes καὶ as ‘though,’ so that the following words are in apposition to ὅσα; (2) καὶ=‘and,’ joins προφερόμενα to the idea contained in οὐ πρὸς τὸ δοκεῖν . . . φυλαξάμενοι, which virtually=ἀρχαῖα, note in Jowett. Both explanations require that ἐπιβοῶνται should be considered grammatically dependent on ὅσα; but this is not likely, and καὶ ὑπὲρ κ.τ.λ. comes in very awkwardly on either of the two suppositions.) The lit. rendering is ‘and they would say things which are brought forward on all occasions.’

παραπλήσια —pred. to προφερόμενα.

ἔς τε γυναῖκας —cf. ές after many verbs of saying, as ᾄδειν, αἰνίττεσθαι, ποιεῖν (to compose).

θεοὺς πατρῴους —esp. Apollo and Zeus; prob. also Athena.

ἀλλ’ —the influence of ὅσα being entirely lost, ἀλλ’ . . . ἐπιβοῶνται is contrasted with ὅσα . . . εἵποιεν ἃν οὐ φυλαξάμενοι . . ., καὶ (εἴποιεν ἂν) . . . προφερόμενα.

ἐπιβοῶνται —sc. τὰ . . . προφερόμενα. So III. 59.2 θεοὺς ἐπιβοώμενοι; VIII. 92 ἐπιβοωμένου . . . μὴ ἀπολέσαι τὴν πατρίδα. This meaning of ἐπιβοᾶσθαι to invoke= ἐπικαλεῖσθαι is not to be found in Attic prose outside Thuc.

ἀναγκαῖα —what would just suffice.

πεζὸν —see c. 60.2 .

τὸν παρακλῃσθέντα διέκπλουν —the opening that had been closed, with chains. When the ζεῦγμα had been formed by the Syr., they must have left a gap in the centre to admit their own ships. Doubtless this gap could be closed with chains, as in the case of λιμένες κληστοί. See c. 70 l. 15. (None of the MSS. readings yield a satisfactory sense; παραλειφθέντα is strongly supported, but there is no sign in the narrative that there was a gap left open. In any case Thuc. has here, as elsewhere, neglected to tell us something which he should have told us.)

προεξαγαγόμενοι —putting off before them.

καὶ = atque 7

αἱ νῆες —sc. τῶν Ἀθηναίων.

τοῖς Συρακοσίοις —does the dat. with ἄρχειν answer the question ‘where,’ or ‘for whom’? Cf. II. 2.1 Πυθοδώρου ἄρχοντος Ἀθηναίοις.

οἱ ἄλλοι —the A. on their part; ἄλλος being exclusive.

τῶν τεταγμένων νεῶν πρὸς αὑτῷ —this order of the prep and case is not very uncommon in the best prose.

σφίσι —should be αὐτοῖς, as οἱ Ἀθηναῖοι is not the subj. of the principal verb ( ἐγίγνετο).

οὐ πρὸς τῷ ζεύγματι κ.τ λ. — the fight, the fiercest fight of the whole war, became general, not in the shape of two great fleets meeting each other in ordered array, but in that of a crowd of separate battles going on everywhere at once, over the whole surface of the Great Harbour. Freeman .

ἐθεράπευον — ἐπεμελοῦντο.

μὴ λείπεσθαι —that these on deck should not fall behind the rest in skill, the combatants being contrasted with the sailors and pilots. With τῆς ἄλλης τέχνης cf. ἑτέρας εὐτυχούσης ῥώμης c. 63

τέ — in fact, summing up the preceding details. Chacun enfin, à sa poste, brûlait de paraîtie le premier. Girard .

ἐμβολαὶ . . . προσβολαὶ —the distinction drawn in note on c. 34 l. 25 accords with Poppo. But the explanation of Arnold fits the passage better: ἐμβολὴ, Arn. says, is the attack made by a ship with her beak, in the regular manner. Προσβολὴ is more general. Here it denotes accidental collisions. But elsewhere it means a regular charge.

ἀνακρούσεις . . . διέκπλους —see on c. 36.4 ll. 29, 37.

ἄλλῃ —sc. νηί .

προσφέροιτο —opt. of indef. frequency again.

ἐπιβαίνειν —here with simple dat.; usually with ἐπὶ and accus.; or, meaning to set foot in, with gen. Cf. the use of ἐπὶ with either gen. or dat. in a local sense.

ξυνετύγχανέ τε —and so it happened . . . that.

τὰ μὲν ἄλλοις κ.τ.λ. —while on the one side they struck others, on the other they were themselves struck.

τοῖς κυβερνήταις κ.τ.λ. —the pilots found themselves forced to guard against one party and make plans against another, and not singly, but at many points on every side, i.e. having to deal with several enemies at the same time.

κατά τε τὴν τέχνην —as their work required it and in the excitement of the moment.

ἐπιβοῶντες —anacoluthon after πολλὴ . . . ἐγίγνετο, as in c. 42.2. Badliam and Herwerden bracket it on the ground that Thuc. would have written ἐπιβοώμενοι. But it is quite possible to consider the κελευσταὶ as a separate body from the ὲπιβάται and other combatants, who are indicated by τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις.

περὶ τῆς —in defence of, περὶ standing in the sense of ὑπέρ, as often in Demosth.

εἴ ποτε καὶ αὖθις —if ever again.

ἀντιλαβέσθαι —absolute, as in II. 8.1. 61

ἐπαυξῆσαι —means to add to the importance of a person or thing.

μὴ κατ’ ἀνάγκην —unnecessarily. Cf. οὐ δῑ ὀλίγου below. How is the difierence of neg. accounted for?

φεύγοντας φεύγουσιν — traductio, for the sake of heightening the contrast.

ὅ τε ἐκ τῆς γῆς —the following vivid description of the behaviour of the troops on shore exhibits a curious approximation to the romantic spirit, but it wants the pathos and the freedom of romanticism; and, fine as it is, the choice and the presentment of the details serve to show how entirely foreign to Thucydides' genius the romantic spirit was. This living picture is finely imitated by Gibbon in his account of the siege of Constantinople by Mahomet II. in 1453.

πολὺν τὸν ἀγῶνα . . . εἶχε —cf. III. 49.1 ἦλθον ἐς ἀγῶνα τῆς δόξης .

ξύστασιν —synonym of ἀγών.

φιλονικῶν — les Siciliens désiraient obtenir une gloire plus grande, et les Athéniens redoutaient un sort plus juste encore que leur condition présente. Girard .

ἀνακειμένων . . . ἐς τὰς ναῦς —as everything depended on the fleet. Cf. Eur. Hec. 802 ὃς εἰς σ’ ἀνελθὼν εἰ διαφθαρήσεται κ.τ.λ.

οὐδενὶ ἐοικὼς —cf. on c. 29

διὰ τὸ ἀνώμαλον —as the fortune of the battle varied, so they received of necessity varying impressions. (Valla supposed that there is a reference in this passage to ‘the unevenness of the ground’; but this is not likely either from what follows or from the condition of the coast. Being close to the water, they could not get a view of the whole.)

l 11.

δῑ ὀλίγου —local; cf. c. 36.5.

ἀνεθάρσησαν ἂν —this is the only example in Thuc. of the iterative ἂν with indic. aor. or imperf. (On this construction sec Mr. Seaton in Classical Review III. p. 343 fol.)

ἐπὶ τὸ ἡσσώμενον =τοὺς ἡσσωμένους. Cf. Eur. Supp. 706 ἦν δ’ ἀγὼν ἰσόρροπος . . . οὐ γὰρ τὸ νικῶν τοῦτ’ ἐκήδευεν, μόνον | ἀλλ’ ᾤχετ’ ἐς τὸ κάμνον οἰκείου στρατοῦ.

ἀπὸ τῶν δρωμένων τῆς ὄψεως —ἀπὸ belongs to τῆς ὄψεως, the order being the same in c. 20.1; 24.2; 31.5 ; 32.1. But, when the art. is inserted with both nouns, this order is very rare in Attic prose outside Thuc. It occurs often in Herod.

τῶν ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ = τῶν μαχομένων.

τὸ ἀκρίτως ξυνεχὲς —‘the continued uncertainty. ἀκρίτως γενομένης τῆς ἁμίλλης. Schol. Notice the freedom with which nouns can be qualified by adverbs.

ἴσα τῇ δόξῃ —according to their feelings.

ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα —cf. c. 19.4.

παρ’ ὀλίγον —cf. c. 2.4 l. 31ZZZ, and the idiom παρὰ μικρόν παρ’ οὐδὲν ἐλθεῖν with infin.

πάντα ὁμοῦ ἀκοῦσαι —cf. Eur. Supp. 710 ἔρρηξε δ αὐδήν, ὥσθ’ ὑπηχῆσαι χθόνα· | ὦ παῖδες, εἰ μὴ σχήσετε στερρὸν δόρυ | σπαρτῶν τόδ’ ἀνδρῶν, οἴχεται τὰ Παλλάδος· and Eur. Heraclid. 838 ἦν δὲ δύο κελεύματα, | ὦ τὰς Ἀθήνας, ὦ τὸν Ἀργείων γύην | σπείροντες, οὐκ ἀρήξετ’ αἰσχύνην πόλει ; and Eur. Heraclid. 832 πόσον τιν’ αὐχεῖς πάταγον ἀσπίδων βρέμειν | πόσον τινὰ στεναγμὸν οἰμωγήν θ’ ὁμοῦ<*>

ὀλοφυρμός —apposition to πάντα. The accus. might have been used as object of ἀκοῦσαι.

νικῶντες, κρατούμενοι —as though ἦσαν ἀκοῦσαι had preceded. The cries would be νικῶμεν, κρατούμεθα.

ἅλλα —instead of τἆλλα. So alia is common in Livy in place of cetera. The asyndeton heightens the effect.

ὅσ’ ἃν . . ἀναγκάζοιτο —ὄσ’ ἂν for ὅσα of MSS. is necessary because the clause does not apply to the Λ. only, but contains a reference to the cries that any army would utter εἰ ἐν μεγάλῳ κινδύνῳ εἴη.

αὐτοῖς —i.e. τοῖς Ἀθηναίοις.

πρίν γε δὴ —cf. on c. 39

λαμπρῶς —decisively, with κατεδίωκον. Cf. c. 55.1; and II. 7.1 λελυμένων λαμπρῶς τῶν σπονδῶν; VIII. 66.3 ; 75.2.

μετέωροι —used similarly in II. 91.3 referring to the middle of the Corinthian Gulf.

κατενεχθέντες —like καταφερομένας in c. 53.1. Contrast προσφέρεσθαι c. 70.5. The corresponding sentence in Diodorus makes this clearer: τῶν δὲ Ἀθηναίων ὄσοι μὴ μετέωροι διεφθάρησαν, ἐπεὶ πρὸς τὰ βράχη προσηνέχθησαν, ἐκπηδῶντες ἐκ τῶν νεῶν ἀπολομένων εἰς τὸ πεζὸν στρατόπεδον ἔφευγον.

οὐκέτι διαφόρως —i.e. no longer with the variety of feeling mentioned above.

ὁρμῆς —of passionate impulse, as in III. 36.2.

οἰμωγῇ τε καὶ στόνῳ —with παρεβοήθουν. Dative of manner. See Rutherford, Syntax p. 66.

δυσανασχετοῦντες —Pollux III. 130 says that this word was first used by Thuc.; it is fairly frequent in late authors

τὰ γιγνόμενα —Kruger compares φθονεῖν τί τινι.

τὸ λοιπὸν τοῦ τείχους =τὸ διατείχισμα.

περὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς . . . διεσκόπουν —cf. Lycurgus 107 περὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ποιητὰς οὐδένα λόγον ἔχοντες.

ξυμφορῶν —preferable to ξυμπασῶν, which is colourless and adds nothing to οὐδεμιᾶς. The consternation was the greatest of their misfortunes.

καὶ —after παραπλήσια as in c. 70.1.

προσαπώλλυντο —the imperf. of ὄλλυμι is often used as here of that which is in danger of happening. Cf. γίγνομαι, δίδωμι. It here corresponds with ἀνέλπιστον ἦν σωθήσεσθαι.

ἐν —the perf. partic. of a verb of motion implies rest in, and so ἐν can be used.

νεκρῶν μὲν πέρι ἢ ν. —proleptic of αἰτῆσαι ἀναίρεσιν This neglect is very significant because (1) it was considered a most solemn duty to bury the dead; (2) Nicias was esp. punctilious in this matter; (3) the same neglect after Arginusae led to the execution of some of the στρατηγοί.

γνώμην ἐποιεῖτο = ἐγίγνωσκε proposed.

ἔτι —yet again.

νῆες χρήσιμαι —is regarded as one word. Hence the order.

l. 23

ἂν ἔτι —with κρατῆσαι.

ὑπονοήσας — ὑπονοεῖν, like ὑποπτεύειν, sometimes= to view with suspicion, sometimes to conjecture.

ἀποχωρῆσαι . . . περιιδεῖν —the infin. with περιορᾶν occurs only in Herod. and Thuc.

λέγων ταῦτα ἂ καὶ αὐτῷ ἐδόκει —probably this means saying what he personally thought they ought to do This interpretation is strongly supported by οἱ δὲ ξυνεγίγνωσκον μὲν καὶ αὐτοὶ and ἐδόκει ποιητέα εἶναι below, with which καὶ αὐτῷ brings our clause into connexion. (The recent edd. who retain these words offer several suggestions, but all except Classen give alternatives and say that the meaning cannot be determined. Classen says ‘saying that which seemed to him from his own conjecture probable,’ thus agreeing with Haacke, Goller, and Arnold. But Bloomfield rightly says that the Syr. knew that the A. would retreat even before the battle—c. 67 Stall and Herwerden reject the words. I think that the edd. have all mistaken the meaning of ἐδόκει, which refers not to the knowledge of Hermocrates, but to his advice. Valla translates ‘Commemorans haec et alia quae ipsi videbantur,’ which, whatever he read, is certainly not what Thuc. meant.)

ἀποικοδομῆσαι —sc. χρεών.

τὰ στενόπορα —those among the hills west of Syr.

προφθάσαντας —Classen, Bohme, and Widmann prefer διαλαβόντας of B, and it is perhaps right. That διαλαμβάνω does not occur elsewhere in Thuc. does not count, as this part of the narrative contains several rare words and ἀγωνισμός, ἀντιτέχνησις, δυσανασχετῶ, and ἐπιφήμισμα, which are not found again in Thuc. προλαμβάνοντες is explained by the schol. φθάνοντες, ὥστε μὴ καταλαμβάνεσθαι at IV. 33. Possibly Thuc. wrote προδιαλαβόντας.

ξυνεγίγνωσκον —the prep. here has an adverbial force.

ἁσμένους . . . ἀναπεπαυμένους —so Sallust Jug. 53, 5 lacti quierant, Postgate's certain correction of laetique erant.

ἀναπεπαυμένους . . . ἑορτῆς οὔσης —cf. c. 51.1.

Ἡρακλεῖ . . . θυσία —the Syr set great store by the fact that the battle fell on a day sacred to Heracles, whose temple was on the hill close to the point at which the A. double wall touched it. Plut. Nic. 25 says that their μάντεις had reported that Heracles required that they should not begin the action. (For the speculations of Timaeus in after times see Plut. Nic 1.)

οὐ δοκεῖν —the verb of ‘saying’ has to be supplied from ξυνεγίγνωσκον by an idiom common in Gk. Oratio Obliqua. ἂν with ἐθελῆσαι.

πρὸς πόσιν τετράφθαι —the metaphorical meaning of τρέπεσθαι πρὸς is much commoner than the literal.

σφῶν —the gen. with πείθομαι is frequent in Herod. but is not found anywhere else in Attic prose. πείθεσθαι is here synonymous with ὺπακοῦσαι of l. 20; and the gen. is also helped by πάντα.

ἐξελθεῖν —depends on πείθεσθαι, which takes sometimes infin., sometimes ὥστε with infin.

ἐπὶ τούτοις —in conseqnence.

καθ’ ἡσυχίαν —see on c. 38.3.

πέμπει —asyndeton after a demonstrative is fairly common.

ἐξ ὅσου = ἐς τοσοῦτον ἐξ ὅσου, the antecedent being omitted as in Plat. Phaedo 78B ὅθεν ἀπελίπομεν ἐπανέλθωμεν, and often with relative adverbs.

διάγγελοι —one would have thought that it was high time for even Nicias to be somewhat sceptical. Moreover he had played a similar trick on the Syr. early in 414 It is strange too that any man who had appeared in the δικαστήρια should not have understood the art of lying. But their sufferings prob. unnerved the A. for the time.

τῶν ἔνδοθεν —neut.

πρὸς τὸ ἄγγελμα —how near this use of πρὸς is to διὰ with accus. may be seen from c. 60.2 πρὸς τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν . . . ἐβουλεύσαντο ἐκλιπεῖν as compared with c. 29.1 διὰ τὴν παροῦσαν ἀπορίαν . . . οὐ βουλόμενοι δαπανᾶν.

οὐκ ἀπάτην —together, as in τὴν τῶν γεφυρῶν οὐ διάλυσιν of I. 137.

καὶ ὣς —i.e. even after waiting that night.

τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν —insequentem diem.

ὡς ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν —as best they could.

ἀναλαβόντες —as though διενοήθησαν had preceded.

αὐτὰ ὅσα —only so much as.

εἰκὸς ἦν . . . ἰέναι —it was natural for the A. to go, ἰέναι being present, as is usually the case with the paradigm of εἶμι except in Oratio Obliqua.

ὐποδοχὴν —of a hostile reception, as accipio in Cic. ad At. I. 18 hunc ego accepi in senatu ut soleo ‘I gave him a warm reception.’

ὥσπερ διενοήθησαν —see c. 60.2.

ὡς ἑκάστην —see on c. 65.2.

ποι ἐκπεπτωκυῖαν —had been driven ashore anywhere.

ἐκόμιζον —the A. dead, whom Nicias had left as they fell, were afterwards buried by the Syr. on Plemmyrium, where their graves and bones have been recently found. (See Freeman Hist. Sic. III. p. 365.)

παρεσκευάσθαι —impersonal.

καὶ ἡ ἀνάστασις —elsewhere this καὶ always follows ὡς ut, not ἐπειδὴ postquam.

δεινὸν οὖν ἦν κ.τ.λ. —probably this passage, which all edd. admit to be exceedingly obscure, means lit.: ‘not only in respect of one point in their condition was it terrible that they were departing after losing all their ships and, in contrast with their high hopes, having to face danger, both to themselves and their city, but also at the same time, as they left the camp, every man encountered things that were painful both to look upon and to think of.’ (The meaning of καθ’ ἓν τῶν πραγμάτων is not certain, and the words might safely be ‘skipped.’ Classen thinks that they may be, and Stahl is certain that they are corrupt. Sitzler reads ἐκεῖνο for καθ’ ἕν. Only Bohme-Widmann are entirely satisfied, taking καθ’ ἓν τῶν πραγμάτων as subject of δεινὸν ἦν—which I agree with Stahl is impossible—and understanding, with Haase, in unum contracta rerum gestarum summa.)

καθ’ ἓν —means generally (1) in detail, singly; but sometimes (2) in one respect, for one reason, as in II. 89.7. Thuc. is contrasting ἓν with πολλά, and means the fact that they were leaving with loss and danger was terrible not on one account only, but for many reasons, and the many reasons are expanded into the clause ἀλλὰ καὶ, etc., which again is developed in §§ 3, 4, through which the general idea δεινὸν ἦν οὐ καθ’ ἓν runs—bnt the subject clause, ὅτι . . κινδυνεύοντες, is lost sight of. καθ’ ἓν γίγνεσθαι = in unum cogi.

τῶν πραγμάτων —expresses the sphere of circumstances in which there were many points of horror, and the circum= stances are those of the ἀποχώρησις .

ὅτι τάς τε κ.τ.λ. —Haase and Rauchenstein alone take this as subject of δεινὸν ἦν, but the notes will show that they are prob. right.

ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει —this being a quasi-temporal word, Thuc. might perhaps have omitted ἐν, as he does with πόλεμος, ἑσβολή.

νεκρῶν —see on c. 74 l. 20.

μετὰ φόβου —partly because they had neglected a duty so sacred as burial, partly because the dead if unburied were likely to haunt the living, partly because they had not gone through the rites of self-purification.

οἱ . . . καταλειπόμενοι —those who were being left behind alive. Cf. οἱ λειπόμενοι=‘the survivors.’

τοῖς ζῶσι —observe that we require here an antithesis to τοῖς καταλειπομένοις—hence the various alterations proposed. But Thuc. may have been guilty of a false antithesis here, as his admirer Lucretius very often is. There is a similar error in Cic. de legibus II. 44 quod constat et ex vexandis vivorum animis et ea fama mortuorum, ut eorum exitium et judicio vivorum et gaudio comprobetur—unless for the second vivorum we should read bonorum, as proposed by P. Thomas.

τῶν ἀπολωλότων ἀθλιώτεροι —the antithesis between the peace of honourable death and the misery of disgraced life became a stock theme of the schools.

καθίστασαν —sc. αὐτούς.

ὅσον — quantum. This seems more expressive than the Vatican ἐς ὅσον , quousque, which is generally adopted.

τῳ —the dat. with προλείπειν is unusual.

ῥώμη —spirit. It suggests high nervous tension—with which Athenians were rarely troubled—as in II. 43.6.

οὐκ ἄνευ ὀλίγων —Valla wrongly renders non sine multis obtestationibus, and all the edd. have mistaken the meaning. The wounded and weak did not stop until they were so utterly exhausted both in body and mind that they could utter only a few appeals and groans. So far from there being no sense in ὀλίγων, there is a terrible amount of sense in it, both as a description of the scene and as an indication of the temperament of Thuc as a man and as an artist.

ἐπιθεασμῶν —Cobet has shown that this is the true orthography, not ἐπιθειασμῶν. Hesych. ἐπιθεάζει· θεοὺς ἐπικαλεῖται .

ἀπολειπόμενοι —being parted from them ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει τοῦ στρατοπέδου, Cf. on l. 27. The preference which most edd show for the Vat. ὑπολειπόμενοι is mexplicable.

ὥστε κ.τ.λ. —this gives the consequence of all the ἀλγεινὰ of l. 12, and thus carries us back to δεινὸν ἦν.

δάκρυσι —the dat. with πίμπλημι, instead of gen., is poetical.

ἀπορίᾳ —causal dat.

ἐκ πολεμίας —sc. ἀφορμωμένους. ἀφορμᾶσθαι shows that this sentence recalls ἐν τῇ ἀπολείψει τοῦ ς. It is interesting to notice that the whole passage from § 2 to § 4, though it contains statements of fact, happens to be arranged in the form of a rhetorical cnthymeme, and is therefore very characteristic of Thuc.

ἢ κατὰ δάκρυα —Herod. III. 14 μέζω κακὰ ἢ ὥστε ἀνακλαίειν. In giavissimo maerore ne lacrimis quidem locus. Haacke.

τῶν ἐν ἀφανεῖ —in such passages we have the best indication of the historian's own religious views as purely negative. In this matter he was in accord with Protagoras, and, as in other matters, with Euripides, at least until the poet's recantation in his old age. Cf. on c. 86.5 .

κατήφειά —exprime un sentiment de honte qui fait baisser les yeux. Didot. Cf. Eur. Med. 956 τί δὴ κατηφεῖς ὄμμα, καἰ δακρυρροεῖς; Having completed the description of the ἀλγεινὰ in the form of an cnthymeme, Thuc. now goes back to the grammatical subject of δεινον οῦν ἦν § 2, viz., ὅτι τάς τε ναῦς ἀπολωλεκότες πάσας ἀπεχώρουν καὶ ἀντὶ μεγάλης ἐλπίδος . . . κινδυνεύοντες. These two aspects of the αποχώρησις —viz., the loss and the change which the loss involved to all —are dealt with in §§ 5, 6, 7, so as to exhibit their effect on the appearance of the army and on the minds of the men, and they are considered together from two points of view, the κατήφεια which they involved and besides (καὶ μὴν, § 6) the ἰσομοιρία which they involved. Thus the whole chap. from § 2 forms a chiasmus, as regards the matter, and it is a perfect example of composition. Macaulay said of ‘the Retreat’ that there was no prose composition in the world that he placed so high.

ὑποφευγούσῃ —the comparison has lost its force for us; but the phenomenon referred to was not a rare one in those times.

ὑπὸ τοῖς ὅπλοις —ἐπὶ in addition to, in place of ὑπό , has been generally accepted, but Widmann rightly says that the change is unnecessary. It is not easy to say how else hoplites could have carried food but in the left hand, and so of necessity beneath the shield.

ἀκολούθων —i.e. θεραπόντων.

παραχρῆμα —sc. ἀπηυτομόλουν.

καὶ μὴν —introducing a new point in the description. Thuc uses καὶ μὴν only in speeches and the more highly wrought parts of the narrative.

ἥ τ’ἄλλη αἰκία κ τ.λ. —lit. the degradation generally and especially the universality of the suffering, though it had some alleviation in the fact that it was shared by many, was nevertheless at that moment thought intolerable. ἡ ἰσομοιρία is the special part of the αἰκία singled out for comment: in this case the universality of the suffering is designated αἰκία because hoplites and knights were suffering the same hardship as the meanest slave. (Junghahn has rightly explained this passage; but the addition of τ’ is necessary in order to get the sense required.)

τὸ μετὰ πολλῶν —Cic. ad At. XI. 6.1 meus dolor non modo non minuitur, cum socium sibi adjungit dolorem tuum, sed etiam augetur. ‘General evils,’ Machiavelli says, ‘are endured more easily than private ones.’

ἀπὸ οἵας —an exclamation, the donble οἷος being used as so often in tragedy to express a marked contrast Trans. ‘especially considering that they’ etc.

ἀφίκατο —the plur. suits αὔχημα much better than the sing. ἀφῖκτο, even if it could be used impersonally.

τὸ διάφορον —reverse.

οἷς =ὅτι αὐτοῖς.

ἀντὶ μὲν τοῦ . . ἥκειν —Herod. has this idiom twice without the article.

δουλωσομένους —for the change from dat. to accus. cf. c. 40.4; 57.9.

τοῦτο —object of πάθωσι.

ναυβατῶν —found in Herod., Thuc., and tragedy only.

ὁπλιτικῷ προσέχοντας μᾶλλον ἢ ναυτικῷ —trusting, not to a fleet, but to hoplites. This was a bad omen for the queen of the sea.

ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑ. —as well as he could, with ἐθάρσυνε .

βοῇ τε χ κ.τ.λ —raising his voice louder and louder still as he went from one line to another. So the note in Jowett, taking ἔτι μᾶλλον with ἑκάστοις, which is much better than understanding a reference back to the previous speech c. 69.2, as there is not much point in saying that he spoke even louder than he had spoken two days before.

γίγνοιτο —why optative?

γεγωνίσκων —a poetical word for γέγωνα.

Ἔτι καὶ ἐκ κ.τ.λ. —even as things are, you must hope on (men have been saved from terrors even greater than these), and you must not reproach yourselves either for your disasters or for your present undeserved sufferings. The speech is based upon the same topics that have been handled in c. 75, §§ 5, 6, 7, viz., the κατήφεια, κατάμεμψις, and ἰσομοιρία.

ξυμφοραῖς —of the battles that had been lost.

l. 7,

κἀγώ τοι κ.τ.λ. —You know that I too, who am as weak as the weakest of you (yes, you see how I am suffering), whose success both in private and in public life is, I think, considered equal to any man's, am now in the same danger and suspense as the humblest of you. Yet have I rendered with exactness my duty to the gods, and just and inoffensive dealing to men. In this rendering the antithesis, to our taste excessive, is modified. Notice the close correspondence of οὔτε ῥώμῃ, etc. and οὔτ’ εὐτυχίᾳ, etc.

προφέρων —see on c. 64.2.

εὐτυχίᾳ —Intr. p. xxxvii. A great deal is to be learned about this word and its relation to εὐδαιμονία in the tragedians, esp. in Euripides. Cf. Arist. Eth. I. 9 πολλαὶ μεταβολαὶ γίνονται καὶ παντοῖαι τύχαι κατὰ τὸν βίον, καὶ ἐνδέχεται τὸν μάλιστ’ εὐθηνοῦντα μεγάλαις συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν ἐπὶ γήρως. Nicias here propounds his doctrine that the gods repay the good and the bad with good and ill fortune in this life. His belief was the same as that of Herodotus.

ἀνθ’ ὧν κ.τ.λ. —therefore I am yet strong in hope for the future, and our misfortunes lose some of their terror. Perhaps they may even cease. For the enemy have had enough success, and if any of the gods was offended at our enterprise, we have now received sufficient punishment.

οὐ κατ’ ἀξίαν δὴ φοβοῦσι —i.e. ( φοβοῦσιν) ἐλασσόνως ἢ κατ’ ἀξίαν Antiphon tetr. Γ. δ 6, lit.: ‘not in accordance with their assumed importance.’ (There are several ways of taking these words. Classen says ‘terrify you more than they ought to do’)

λωφήσειαν —of the cessation of pain or trouble, as in II. 49.5. Plat. Phaedrus 251 C λωφᾷ τῆς ὀδύνης .

ἱκανὰ γὰρ —contrast with this Eur. Supp. 226 κοινὰς γὰρ ὁ θεὸς τὰς τύχας ἡγούμενος | τοῖς τοῦ νοσοῦντος πήμασιν διώλεσε | τὸν οὐ νοσοῦντα κοὐδὲν ἠδικηκότα.

ἦλθον γάρ που κ.τ.λ. —others besides us have attacked their neighbours before now, and after doing what men will do have endured what men can bear. So now it is reasonable for us to hope that the gods will relent towards us (for we deserve their pity now rather than their envy), and do you, seeing what fine troops you are and how great the numbers that march in your ranks, be not excessively alarmed, etc. 23

ἀνθρώπεια κ.τ.λ. —cf. Eur. Heraclid. 424 ἀλλ’, ἢν δίκαια δρῶ δίκαια πείσομαι. Cic. Tusc. 1, 72 humana vitia=ἀνθρώπινα κακα.

τά τε ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου —the whole of this passage is very characteristic of Nicias. Cf. Herod. III, 40 ἐμοὶ δὲ αἱ σαὶ μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι οὐκ ἀρέσκουσι, τὸ θεῖον ἐπισταμένῳ ὡς ἔστι φθονερόν.

ἠπιώτερα —in the old sense, expressing a father's pity for his children, and hence transferred to the gods. Cf. the meanings of ἐπισκοπεῖν.

καὶ ὁρῶντες —the transition from τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ θείου is purposely made abrupt, so as to exhibit the close eonnexion between the gods and men.

καταπέπληχθε —strictly this should have been καταπεπλῆχθαι after τά τε ἐλπίζειν.

δέξαιτο —resist.

τὴν δὲ πορείαν κ.τ.λ. —do you yourselves look to your safety and discipline on the road; let every man think that the ground on which he is forced to fight will be his country and fortress if he wins it.

σπουδὴ δὲ —we shall hurry.

εἰρημένον —accus. abs.

ἀναγκαῖόν τε ὂν —arguments drawn from τὸ ἀναγκαῖον are common in Greek rhetoric. 49

οἵ τε ἄλλοι —still depends on γνῶτε.

ἄνδρες γὰρ πόλις —a similar γνώμη occurs in many authors. Soph. OT 56 ὡς οὐδἐν ἐστιν οὔτε πύργος οὔτε ναῦς | ἐρῆμος ἀνδρῶν μὴ ξυνοικούντων ἔσω.

ἄμα —with παρακελευόμενος.

οὐδὲν ἧσσον —sc. ἐπῄει.

τὸ δὲ —sc. στράτευμα. Apparently each of the two divisions formed its own square.

καὶ ἐπειδὴ ἐγένοντο —the object of the A. before the last battle had been to reach Catana. Holm and Lupus think that they had given up all hope of reaching it. The alternative to Catana was some friendly town, west or south Freeman and Grote think that, as long as they were trying to reach the Acraean rock (see c. 80), they still hoped to get to Catana, though of course by an indirect route. The Acraean rock is due west of Syr.

τῇ διαβάσει —i.e. where the regular route crossed the river.

ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν —np the ascent that leads to Floridia. They were now following the modern road.

κατέβησαν —although the ἄπεδον, level ground about Floridia, is higher than the road, yet Freeman thinks that this word is consistent with the state of the ground immediately south of Floridia. Holm however thinks that either Thuc. has made a slip or the text is wrong.

Ἀκραῖον λέπας —a height near Floridia, with broken rocks covered with straggling veidure. The position was very favourable to the Syr.

αὐτοὺς —for the order cf. III. 61.1 ἵνα μήτε ἡ ἡμετέρα αὐτοὺς κακία ὠφελῆ?.

ὁμοίως —as before.

ἀποχωρεῖν —i.e. from the main body, for the purpose of foraging

ἐβιάσαντο πρὸς —forced their way to.

οὐκ ἐπ’ ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων —in a deep line; cf. II. 90 ἐπὶ τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς. The gen. is commoner than the accus., which is also used in these military phrases; Xen. Hel. VI 4, 12 ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι; Aristoph. Frag. ἵστασθ’ ἐφεξῆς ἐπὶ τρεῖς ἀσπίδας.

διικνοῦντο — βάλλοντες.

πρὸς μετόπωρον —Aristoph. Eccles. 20 πρὸς ὄρθρον ἐστίν.

ἐπὶ τῷ σφετέρῳ ὀ —cf. ἐπὶ κακῷ γίγνεσθαι.

ἐκ τοῦ ὄπισθεν —i.e. between their halting-place and their camp of the night before. Freeman .

πρὸς τὸ πεδίον μᾶλλον —rather south of the haltingplace of the two previous nights.

προυχώρουν —in what direction was this advance? the generals now gave up the thonght of forcing their way to that particular [Acraean] cliff by that particular pass [above Floridia] Their object seems now to have been to find some other road, some other pass, in the same neighbourhood, which might lead them to the high ground [to the west], and which the Syr. might not have occupied. Freeman . (The progress of the fifth day should not be marked in the plans by a line running straight to the south, but should bend away to the west with the bend in the brook that forms the southern branch of the Cyane)

πανταχῆ . . . κύκλῳ —to be taken close together..

ἀνεπαύοντο —a little south of the camp of the previous night.

τῶν τε ἐ. . . . ἀπορίᾳ . . . καὶ . . . ἦσαν —these are the two reasons given for κακῶς εἷχε, the principal clause replacing a subordinate.

τοὐναντίον —i.e. no longer westwards, with no further attempt to reach the high ground.

ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς —Holm says that this refers to the whole of the march ever since they left Lysimeleia. Freeman however refers it to what immediately precedes about πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν. He thinks that it was the road leading eventually to Catana that the Syr. had specially blocked. But neither view is satisfactory. It is clear that ἡ ξύμπασα ὁδὸς αὕτη (1) is contrasted with τὴν αὐτὴν ὁδὸν ᾗ διενοήθησαν, (2) implies nothing of necessity as to their previous purpose, being a geographical note about ἡ πρὸς τὴν θάλασσαν ὁδός. Thuc. does not say that the A. no longer hoped to reach Catana, but that this road did not lead ultimately in that direction. The intention of the A. was throughout the same— ἀποχωρεῖν ᾗ ἂν τάχιστα μέλλωσί τινος χωρίου . . . φιλίου ἀντιλήψεσθαι c. 60.2, whether circumstances offered Catana or any other place. (It is futile to discuss whether they intended ultimately to reach Catana or not. Probably the question was never discussed by them.)

φόβοι καὶ δείματα ἐγ —epexegesis of οἷον. Note δεῖμα panic, δέος apprehension, φόβος fear. [

ἀπὸ ]—a dittography of the syllable that follows If this were genuine, we should have ἀπιοῦσιν. Moreover ‘si quis ἀπό τινος ἔρχεται, quodam modo eum eo conjunctns fuisse et nunc ab eo segregari cogitatur.’ Sobolewski.

ἰοῦσιν —with αὐτοῖς.

ἀφικνοῦνται —sc. τὸ Νικίου στράτευμα. ὅμως means notwithstanding the trouble caused by the disorder of Demosthenes' division.

πρὸς τὴν θ —near to the coast

τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν Ἐλωρινὴν —the ancient road from Syr. to its dependency Helorus, which had been seized from the Sicels in order to prevent them from reaching the S.E. corner of Sicily. N. reached the road at some point north of the Cacyparis. 27

ὅπως —presumably this arrangement had been made with Demosthenes.

Κακυπάρει —the Cassibile.

ἄνω —inland. They still hoped to reach the hill country of the Sicels.

ἤλπιζον —Holm says that this seutence refers to c. 77.6 προπέπεμπται ὡς αὐτούς etc., and that this proves that the A. had not intended to get to Catana, since they had ordered the Sicels to meet them on the Cacyparis But if they had pursued their original route over the Acraean rock, they might have eome out somewhere near the source of the Cacyparis, but quite fourteen miles from where they now crossed the river. If they meant to follow thc river up to some point which they had been trying to reach from the first, still nothing is proved with regard to their ultimate intentions. Freeman thinks that Nicias had sent fresh messages to the Sicels when he changed his route. But it is quite likely that he assumed that the Sicels would march down the stream when they failed to find him higher up.

Ἐρινεόν —it is not certain what stream is meant; but it is generally thought to be the Cavallata.

ἐκέλευον —sc. χωρεῖν—this was done in the hope that they might find some way into the interior that was unoccupied by the enemy.

ἡ ήμέρα —i.e. the day referred to above.

ἐν αἰτίᾳ . . . εἶχον =ᾐτιῶντο .

ὑστέροις οὖσι —it is not known whether Demosth. crossed the Cacyparis or not.

τότε —referring to c. 80.4.

δίχα δὴ ὄντας —sc. ἀπὸ τῶν μετὰ Νικίου.

θαα—σσόν τε —this is answered by ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης below, τε . . . δέ replacing μὲν . . . δἐ, as often in tragedy. Cf. III. 52 τούς τε ἀδίκους κολάσειν, παρὰ δίκην δ’ οὐδἐνα. As for τε γὰρ meaning namque, there is no certainty that it occurs in good Attic. Several passages cited by Shilleto on Demosth. F. L. 176 are corrupt, and the rest are prob. instances of anacoluthon. Generally where τε is not answered by καὶ there is a parenthesis, which interrupts the construction, as in Plat. Gorg. 524B where τό τε σῶμα is eventually answered by ταὐτὸν δή μοι δοκεῖ . . . καὶ περὶ τὴν ψυχήν.

ἐν τῷ τοιούτῳ —this phrase is used of circumstances of any kind.

ἑκόντας εἶναι — εἶναι is infin. of limitation, and in this phrase is almost confined to neg. sentences.

ὅσ’ ἂν ἀναγκάζωνται —as C has ὅσα ἀναγκάζωνται, Dobree's correction, by which the sense is much improved, should be accepted.

τὰ πλείω — plerumque.

ἐνδιατρίβων —VIZ. ἐν τῷ ξυντάσσεσθαι. Note the word, which is useful.

ἀνειληθέντες —synonym of συστραφέντες.

ἔς τι χωρίον —Plutarch says this was the estate that had belonged to Polyzelus, probably the brother of Gelon, Hiero, and Thrasybulus, the tyrants.

ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν —on both sides. (Leake, Grote, and Freeman wrongly translate as though it were ἄντικρυς.)

περισταδόν —found, except here, only in Herod. and poets.

ξυσταδὸν μάχαις —adverb qualifying verbal noun, as cc. 34, 6, l. 34; 71, 3.

Φειδώ τις ἐγίγνετο —with τῳ=πᾶς τις ἐφείδετο

ἐπ’ —ut in. The μὴ is inserted because hindrance is implied.

τῶν νησιωτῶν —who might be expected to be willing to desert. Cf. c. 57.4.

εἴ τις βούλεται =τὸν βουλόμενον. No infin. is then added.

ἐπ’ ἐλευθερίᾳ —expressing the terms, as in ἐπὶ τούτοις, etc.

οὐ πολλαί —we cannot be sure that it was loyalty to Athens that prevented more from going over, though Grote seems to assume it.

ὁ. γίγνεται ὥστε —the active in III. 28.1 ποιοῦνται ὸμολογίαν ὥστε. This use of ὥστε is very common.

ἐς ἀσπίδας ὑπτίας —Aristoph. Lysist. 185 θὲς ἐς τὸ πρόσθεν ὑπτίαν τὴν ἀσπίδα.

τούτους —Philistus of Syracuse, a contemporary historian, related that Demosth. attempted to commit suicide, but was prevented by the enemy. The fact is reported by Plutarch and Pausanias.

καθῖσε τὴν ς. —observe that Thuc. uses the earlier form of the augment whenever there are two ways of angmenting a verb: e.g. χρῆν, not ἐχρῆν; καθῖζον, not ἐκάθιζον; ἑνηντιούμην, not ἠναντιούμην; see Rutherford New Phryn. p. 81; and for the Attic uses of καθίζω ib. p. 336.

σπένδεται —the middle expresses reciprocity.

πέμψαι —σπένδομαι can also take fut. infin.

ἔβαλλον —Plutarch adds πρὸς ὕβριν καὶ μετ’ ὀργῆς ἀπειλοῦντες.

καὶ τούτους —as they had done before to Demosth.

φυλάξαντες —cf. II. 3 φυλάξαντες ἔτι νύκτα=‘waiting for the time when it was still night.’

τὸ ἡσυχάζον —cf. c. 68.1

ἀναλαμβάνουσί τε . . . καὶ —parataxis, as often with τε . . . καὶ, καὶ . . . καὶ, μὲν . . . δὲ.

ἐχώρουν —they were afterwards caught; c. 85.2.

ἦγε —still along the Helorine road, hoping to find an unguarded way to the right.

Ἀσσίναρον —the name only occurs in the accounts of the retreat. It is identified as the Falconara.

ἅμα μὲν βιαζόμενοι —because, being harassed by the cavalry and the light-armed, they thought that they would be somewhat better off if they crossed the river, and also owing to their suffering and thirst. One cause of ἠπείγοντο is οἰόμενοι, the other is ὑπὸ τῆς ταλαιπωρίας. The rest, βιαζόμενοι . . . ὄχλου, is subordinate to οἰόμενοι. So Bauer, Kruger, Classen, Fr. Muller. Poppo made βιαζόμενοι depend on ἠπείγοντο, and οἰόμενοι as well; but in all other cases in which two participles stand thus in the same relation to the verb, Thuc. either joins them by καὶ or places the verb between them. Stahl places οἰόμενοι . . . ποταμόν after ταλαιπωρίας, and this greatly improves the sense, since it is hard to see the bearing of βιαζόμενοι on οἰόμενοι. Why should the attacks diminish after they had crossed the river? Perhaps the A. thought they would then turn off to the right and shake off the enemy to some extent. (In any case the sentence is not a good one.)

περί τε . . . διεφθείροντο —cf. πίπτειν, πταίειν and σφάλλεσθαι περὶ with dat.; but the construction is poetical and Ionic.

σκεύεσιν — accoutrements.

ἐμπαλασσόμενοι = ἐμπλεκόμενοι. The word occurs nowhere else in Attic.

ἐς τὰ ἐπὶ θάτερα —regarded as one word.

ἦν —the subject to be supplied from the context.

κοίλῳ —with a deep bed; a meaning that occurs several times in Plutarch, e.g. Lucul. 24.

ἐπικαταβάντες —both banks of the Assinarus are steep, and the water, as usual in Sicily, does not fill the whole of its bed, which is wide. The Pel. went down the bank into the bed and cut down the A., while the Syr. stood on the opposite bank to prevent the A. from getting across.

εὐθὺς διέφθαρτο —the plup. is occasionally thus used with εὐθὺς to express a result hastily arrived at, esp. in combination with the imperf., e.g. Dem. 19.154 τότ’ εὐθὺς ἐγνώκειν καὶ προεωρώμην.

ὁμοῦ τῷ πηλῷ —with ἐπίνετο.

τοῦ μὲν . . . τοῦ δὲ —apposition to διεφθαρμένου.

πιστεύσας μᾶλλον — N. had always been, as far as his duty allowed him, a friend of Sparta. Freeman .

χρήσασθαι . . . ὅ τι βούλονται —regular formula for an unconditional surrender.

φονεύοντας —an Ionic word, found often in tragedy and Herod., and four times in Thuc. See Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 15.

ἀπεκρύψαντο —sc. οἱ Συρακόσιοι, hid for their own purposes, to keep or to sell.

τοὺς διωξομένους —the fut. partic. with art.—not a very common construction—refers to no definite person.

τὸ . . . ἁθροισθὲν —for the neut. cf. c. 43.7.

ἐς τὸ κοινὸν —just as τὸ κοινὸν is used of the state treasury, since the prisoners became state property.

ἀπὸ ξυμβάσεως —cf. c. 82.2 ὁμολογία γίγνεται. In the case of Demosth. there were definite terms and his men surrendered to the state.

ἐντῷ . . . πολέμῳ τούτῳ —there have been from early times two ways of understanding this passage: (1) the scholiast thinks that Thuc. is comparing the disaster at the Assinarus with those of the Pel. war generally: accordingly he thinks Σικελικῷ is wrong. So Kruger, Stahl: (2) Valla understands him to be comparing this disaster with other battles of the Sicilian war. The scholiast is probably right, since there is no other instance of great carnage, φόνος or σφαγή, in the Sicihan war with which the last disaster could be aptly compared; and as Thuc. was writing the history of the Sicilian expedition, not as a separate work, but as part of his general history, it is strange that he should speak of the Sicilian campaigns only in giving an idea of the extent of the loss. (Arnold says ‘it is as if an historian of the French campaign in Russia were to say of their loss at the Beresina, “that it was greater than on any other occasion throughout this Russian campaign.”’ But, after the losses of 1812, that statement would convey an idea of awful slaughter, whereas this does not.)

παραυτίκα —these were some cavalry, who under command of Callistratus made their escape to Catana. Pausanias 7.16.4.

ἐς Κατάνην —among these were Tydeus, afterwards one of the generals at Aegospotami, and the son of Polystratus for whom Lysias wrote the speech ὑπὲρ Πολυστράτου. They continued to fight for Catana against Syr. Lys. 20.24.

τὰ σκῦλα —Plut. Nic. 27 says that the finest trees on the banks of the Assinarus were decked with A. panoplies.

κατεβίβασαν —by a decree passed in the assembly at Syr. after a debate of which Diodorus and Plutarch give details. The quarries are among the most striking features of Syracusan topography, most of them running in a long row along the S.E. side of Achradina. They are now disused and exceedingly picturesque. The date of the sentence is about the middle of September.

ἄκοντος Γυλίππου —Hermocrates also, as Diod. and Plut. relate, spoke against the motion which was proposed by a leader of the democrats.

ἀπέσφαξαν —we know from Plutarch that Philistus agreed with Thuc. that Demosth. and N. were put to death, and this confirmation by the contemporary Sicilian historian is too strong to be set aside by the story of Timaeus that they were allowed to commit suicide. (The manner of their death is unknown; in Plut. Nic. 28 Δημοσθένην δὲ καὶ N. ἀποθανεῖν Τίμαιος οὔ φησιν ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων καταλευσθέντας? (or κελευσθέντας), ὡς Φίλιστος ἔγραψε καὶ Θουκυδίδης, I believe that we should read καταδεθἐντας unless καταλευσθέντας could mean cast into the stone quarries, as Hesych. explams the word.)

τοῖς ἄλλοις —sc. ἀγωνίσμασι.

νήσῳ —Sphacteria, in 425 B.C.

ὥστε ἀφεθῆναι —depends on προυθυμήθη: cf. c. 62.4; 77.5 .

διὰ τὴν πᾶσαν κ.τ.λ. —describe the ethical excellence of N.; for ἐπιτήδευσιν shows that Thuc. is not thinking of the military sense of ἀρετή. On the whole he uses ἀρετὴ as Plato does, i.e. as embracing the fonr cardinal virtues, ἀνδρεία, σωφροσύνη, δικαιοσύνη, φρόνησις, and, though later writers had an idea that N. was a coward, there is nothing to show that he was more than a moral coward. Thuc. himself admits moral cowardice on the part of N. when he attributes superstition to him. The construction is disputed, but it is natural to suppose that both πᾶσαν and νενομισμένην belong to ἐπιτήδευσιν, not to ἀρετήν. Trans. ‘because he had directed his course of life wholly in accordance with virtuous principles,’ i.e. in accordance with elementary ethical principles, not in accordance with any school of philosophy. νομίζω=I put into practice; ἐπιτήδευσις=a theory of life, on which concrete ἐπιτηδεύματα are based. Thuc. attributes οὐ δημοτικὴ παρανομία to Alcibiades. We recall too the sneer of Plato in Phaedo 82 A οἱ τὴν δημοτικήν τε καὶ πολιτικὴν ἀρετὴν ἐπιτετηδευκότες, ἣν δὴ καλοῦσι σωφροσύνην τε καὶ δικαιοσύνην, ἐξ ἔθους τε καὶ μελέτης γεγονυῖαν ἄνευ φιλοσοφίας τε καὶ νοῦ.

μετεχείρισαν —Thuc. like Herod., uses the act. of this word, whereas other authors use the middle.

οἵ ἥλιοι —the plur. is intensive, as in θέρμαι, καύματα.

ἐς ἀσθένειαν ἐνεωτέριζον —like βάλλειν or τρέπειν εἰς, of some enforced change of state; ‘through the change of temperature induced disease.’

τῶν νεκρῶν . . . οἳ . . . ἀπέθνῃσκον —it appears that νεκροὶ ἀποθνῄσκουσι is possible Greek, as in Plut. Pyrrhus 21 τραυμάτων πολλῶν γενομένων καὶ νεκρῶν πεσόντων, and perhaps Thuc. II. 52 νεκροὶ ἐπ’ ἀλλήλοις ἀποθνῄσκοντες ἔκειντο.

ἐπὶ ὀκτὼ μῆνας —sc. daily. This allowance is what was called in c. 82 ἡ ἀναγκαιοτάτη δίαιτα, and is half that which was given to a slave. Diodorus, following the Sicilian account, says that each man received two χοίνικες of meal, i.e. four times as much as two κοτύλαι.

ἄλλα ὅσα —for ὅσα ἄλλα, found also in II. 96.3.

ἐν τῷ τ. . . ἐμπεπτωκότας — ἐν is occasionally used with verbs of motion.

ἐπεγένετο — accidit.

πλὴν Ἀ. κ.τ.λ. —comparing l. 15 we see that these were kept in the quarries some six months longer.

ἔργον —used in its vague, euphemistic sense, as in τὸ περὶ τὸν Ἴτυν ἔργον. [

Ἑλληνικὸν ]—to be omitted, since there is no contrast between the doings of Greeks and of other men.

δοκεῖν —infin. of limitation; c. 49.3.

ὧν ἀκοῇ —cf. Herod. VII. 170 φόνος Ἑλληνικὸς μέγιστος οὗτος δὴ ἐγἐνετο πάντων ὧν ἡμεῖς ἴδμεν, of the destruction of the Tarentines and Rhegines by the Iapyges.

κατὰ πάντα . . . πάντως —paronomasia, to emphasise the statement.

πανωλεθρίᾳ —cf. πανώλεθρος ἀπόλλυσθαι in tragedy.

ὀλίγοι ἀπὸ πολλῶν —a common collocation.

ἀπενόστησαν —the well-known story in Plut. Nic. 29 that some gained liberty or shelter by reciting Euripides is by no means improbable; for, apart from the great popularity of Euripides, the Athenian slaves, weakened by suffering and unused to mauual labour, must have been a burden to their owners. With the Athenian retreat we might compare the retreat of Antony from Parthia in 36 B.C. Cf. Browning Balaustion's Adventure, and Byron Childe Harold 4.16: When Athens' armies fell at Syracuse, And fetter'd thousands bore the yoke of war, Redemption rose up in the Attic Muse, Her voice their only ransom from afar: See! as they chant the tragic hymn, the car Of the o'ermaster'd victor stops, the reins Fall from his hands, his idle scimitar Starts from its belt—he rends his captive's chains, And bids him thank the bard for freedom and his strains.